JP2017196123A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which is represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, or a reel game machine (slot machine) and which has features on operation means.SOLUTION: The game machine is provided with first operation means 137 and second operation means 136. The second operation means 136 is means which may be used in one setting operation (a selection setting operation of a type of ready-to-win explained by using Fig. 159 (a), a volume setting operation explained by using Fig. 159 (A), and a music setting operation explained by using Fig. 159 (1)). In response to the operation of the first operation means 137, a first presentation, which is a notice presentation (a judge presentation shown in Fig. 158 (l) to (o)), is started. In the first presentation, the second operation means 136 is vibrated (Fig. 158 (l) to (o)).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 159

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such a game table is provided with an operation means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the operation means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in operation means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
The second operation means is a means that may be used for one setting operation,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first performance, the second operation means vibrates.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production in which the operation means is involved. It is a figure which shows an example regarding the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through a weak SP reach effect, and it makes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG.16 and FIG.17. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where it loses | hangs out while performing the production | presentation which involved the operation means A (chance button 136) through strong SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the effect which entangled the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed through a strong SP reach effect, and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the chance button 136 which is the operation means A starts a vibration according to operation of the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in a step. It is a figure which shows an example which operated the chance button 136 which is the operation means A after operating the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B in the step. It is a figure which shows an example in case the timing which operates the permeation | transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is later than the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates when a housing | casing vibrates. It is a figure which shows the example which permeable part 191 itself rotates in the front-back direction, and vibrates strongly. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the scene where the enemy character wins is displayed once through a strong SP reach production, but becomes a big hit by a revival production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 28 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the notice effect produced in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the pseudo-ream step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the other effect which entangled the pseudo-ream in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shake variation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 36 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th effect and a 5th effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example when the timing which operates button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39 in a step. It is a figure for further explaining the relation between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of the promotion effect. It is the figure which showed two other examples regarding a promotion effect. It is a figure for demonstrating general timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which may display the timer warning display T according to button operation in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the timing of back button operation, and the timing of a holding | maintenance increase. It is a figure which shows two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the method of the display including the timer announcement display T. FIG. It is a figure showing an example in case a timer notice overlaps with other effects accompanied by countdown of remaining time. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which the timer announcement display T is displayed on the device different from the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mode of the change display of the decoration symbol in which the animation of a holding | maintenance icon is performed in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in a design stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of a hold increase during a symbol stop in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of two hold increasing during a pattern fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case the holding | maintenance increases two while the symbol stops. It is a figure for demonstrating winning order fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of simultaneous change of the holding | maintenance icon in case a holding | maintenance increases in winning order fluctuation in steps. It is a figure which shows an example when a hold | maintenance increases during a stop display in a winning order fluctuation | variation, and it becomes a hold full tank. It is a figure which shows the example by which a simultaneous change effect is not performed depending on the type of the hold icon currently displayed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change production when it becomes a reserve full tank in winning order change. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the other pachinko machine 100 applicable to this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.78 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 83 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 in stages. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 in stages. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. FIG. 110 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the hold change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 139 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the symbol fluctuation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the notice icon digestion effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a 2nd chance button vibrates and light-emits during execution of the production | presentation according to operation of the 1st chance button. It is a figure for demonstrating setting operation. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the icon regarding the 2nd chance button 137 is displayed in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the icon regarding the 1st chance button 136 is displayed in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect using the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means in the slot machine shown in FIG. 63 in steps.

  Hereinafter, a ball ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. Here, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”, and the “principal ball” and “lending ball” are collectively referred to as “ Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of performing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmission portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, a family crest character 247 (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) and a pair of combined characters 248 (see FIG. 22 and the like) to be combined with the family crest character 247 are prepared. The family crest character 247 corresponds to an example of a first effect movable body, and the combined character 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The family crest character 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When the operation starts, the family crest member 247 falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined objects 248 are disposed at the initial positions on the left side and the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the combined object 248 starts its operation, the left and right are advanced from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the family crest character 247 from the left and right, and merge with the crest character. Whether it is a family crest character 247 or a pair of combined characters 248, it is more difficult for the player to see in the state in which it is in the initial position than when it overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 that detects the operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Data is read out and displayed using the work area of VRAM 436. And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 performs drive control of various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a family crest accessory 247, and a combined accessory 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol changes at a high speed (scrolled) for each symbol display area. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hitting time. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for timer number determination for special drawing and for universal use, both of which determine a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the prior / no-go determination is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hits in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading notice) of the pre-determination result is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general figure B shown in FIG. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the short time number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start region) (entrance rate) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the decoration pattern fluctuation pattern in the decoration symbol display device 208. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating information, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command displays a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image that informs the player that the big hit is to be ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the big win game Ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313, and the movable body control is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 according to the effect data read here. The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control processing here, various movable bodies (chance buttons 136 that can perform advancing and retreating operations, transmissive portions 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, family crests 247, combined roles are obtained from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of each of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a variation icon display region 208e is provided in the center portion of the effect display region 208d, and a hold icon display region 208f is located on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A, four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B, a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. May be. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 and a fourth symbol 2082 of special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that.

  In addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 9 shows a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. ing.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lighting” is used here, it may be “flashing” (hereinafter the same).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a castle town background image. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display a stop symbol of the loss (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3). The star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 3) of an arrow display 136b and a “press” character display as a prompt display for prompting the user), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9D starts to light in red and prompts to be pressed.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice that suggests whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9G, the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. Yes. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (h), characters of super reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “decoration” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter FIG. As shown in (h ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” without developing into super reach. Has been. Even if “unfortunate” is displayed, there is a case where a big hit is caused by a reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is not always accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 is “movable”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 and the like. The LED and the light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as “Vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 is production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 is production data after operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used as the production data after operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, a notification that prompts the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, the decorative design display device 208 starts the judgment effect. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), an effect such as vibration of the operating means A is ended before notifying the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, so that the player can concentrate on notifying the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the decorative design display device 208 starts a judge effect. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs the user that the next winning round is aimed at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening). The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (b), if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (c) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the decorative symbol variation display, or a judge indicating the end of the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) in stages, and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  The description of the matters described above in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 is omitted. In each drawing of FIG. 14, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the chance button 136 that is the operation means A, a transparent portion 191 that is the operation means B is also shown. 14 and 15, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B is in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 14 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. Four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14 (a) are lit, and four decorative symbol display devices 208 are displayed with four black circle holding icons which are the holding indications of special Fig. 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 14B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B are lit, and only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, a fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14C, a reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  Here, as in FIG. 9, an example is shown in which the button effect is started when the reach effect is started. The button effect here is a kind of judge effect, and becomes a notice effect for judging whether or not to develop into a super reach. The button effect may be an effect of judging the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red as shown in FIG. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display that prompts the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and Three characters, “PUSH” and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid (operation effective period) are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X for operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the initial position display 136X may be used without including the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “PUSH”. For example, the initial position display 136X may not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

  FIG. 14 (e) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 14 (e). When the chance button 136 is operated, the red light up to that point is switched to white light or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 14F). The family crest character 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, covers a part of the change icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the change icon c. The fall of the family crest character 247 is a result of the judgment of the development to the super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14G, the decoration pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect and the background image changes. . After the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), the family crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the frog. In the super reach production, in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the first super reach production (weak SP reach production) having a relatively low possibility of a big hit and the second having a relatively high possibility of a big hit. The super-reach effect (strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the eyelid corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Even in this weak SP reach production, a judgment production is performed. Judge production here is an effect to judge whether or not it will be a big hit, it corresponds to the final judge production, and if the princess character appears from the inside when the kite opens, the display of the pattern change currently being performed It will be an indication of the judgment result that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 14 (i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. In FIG. 14 (j), although it is not understood, in FIG. 14 (j), a shadow of something appears thinly in the cloud-like effect display e1, and in FIG. 14 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the character display “Rescue the princess” is displayed on the upper right. It should be noted that the character display “Rescue the princess” may be displayed from the timing of FIG. The shade of something described in the explanation of FIG. 10J is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIG. 14 (i) and FIG. 14 (j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 14 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 14 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated again at the timing of FIG. 14 (l), and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (m) following FIG. 14 (l), there is no one in the bag that is open, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. . Even during execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is located at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  Even if the chance button 136 as the operation means A is not operated within the operation effective period, the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated and the chance button 136 is not operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when a different operation means (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same for the production that judges whether or not it will develop into the super-reach, or it may be limited to the production that judges whether or not it develops into the super-reach, It may be limited to the final judge production that becomes the direct judge for the jackpot.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  Eventually, when the special symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 is finished and finalized, the decorative symbol is also finalized. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "-" Decoration 4 "-" decoration 3 "is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is made, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. FIG.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), the family crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the leopard, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Also here, as shown in FIG. 16 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed, and in FIG. 16 (j), some shadows are visible in the effect display e1. . Further, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 performs an advance operation (protrusion operation) while vibrating. In addition, you may start a vibration after protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly halfway between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the middle position. Further, at the timing of FIG. 16 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and a chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in the state where it has advanced to the middle position in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Three simulated button images 136a1, an arrow display 136b, and a remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y for operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of a second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the intermediate position display 136Y may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 becomes zero or until the chance button 136 is pushed. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification It may be at the same time or after that. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples of the advancement start timing of the chance buttons 136 listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, Types may be applied. Further, the timing of completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as it is during the weak SP reach production, or may be simultaneously with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. Also good. The vibration start of the chance button 136 may not coincide with the start of advance of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advance. In the later case, for example, the vibration may be started at the same time as or after completion of the advance operation of the chance button 136 (stop). Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if it is pushed in even a little, or may continue to vibrate until it is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIG. 16 (i) and FIG. 16 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 16 (k) where the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 16 (i) that the final judge production has started, or it can be seen that the final judge production has been started from the point when the chance button 136 starts to advance, and the chance button 136. It can also be seen that the final judge production has started from the time when reaches the intermediate position.

  FIG. 16 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the intermediate position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. 16 (l), is pushed to the initial position, and the final judgment is made. The result of the performance judge is displayed. In FIG. 17 (m) following FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position and is not vibrating, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character GC behind the bag. The judgment result here will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of a second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect started in response to an operation of the chance button 136 that is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time when the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated). It may be started when the first time elapses after the start of the weak SP reach production.

  Note that the effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured so that the chance button 136 vibrates without fail.

  In this example, the chance button 136 has advanced, but it may be in a state where it remains at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  When the final judge effect is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the fluctuations of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” as shown in FIG. ), “Decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are fixedly displayed and a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 15 from the shaking fluctuation display to the final display, the background screen has no pattern. However, in the case of a big hit, the background screen is a collection of lords. In the case of a big hit, a promotion type of jackpot type (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without probability change to a big hit with probability change) may be performed during the fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17.

  In FIG. 18, the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 16D to 16G). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i), an effect display e1 is displayed. In FIG. 18 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, lights in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. In addition, after advancing to the maximum advancing position, it may be stopped after returning by the first amount toward the initial position. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (k), a button image 136a2 simulating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in the state where it has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow display Three of 136b and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as a maximum advance position display 136Z for operation promotion notification. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of a second notification. It should be noted that the maximum advance position display 136Z may be used without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

  The maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification hides a part of the character display “Rescue the princess” because the button image 136a2 is large. Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where it has advanced only to the intermediate position or the case where it has not advanced but stays at the initial position. .

  FIG. 18 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) to the maximum advanced position, which is the operation means A at the timing of FIG. The judgment result of the judge performance is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (m), a princess character GC is displayed at the back of the bag, and it is confirmed that the judgment result here is a big hit. In FIG. 18 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 that has vibrated at the maximum advance position vibrates both during the push-in operation and after returning to the initial position, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by a pressing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may suspend vibration once it is pushed in, and resume vibration after returning to the initial position. Alternatively, the vibration is temporarily interrupted at the same time as returning to the initial position. May be resumed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 has advanced (protruded), and regardless of the amount of advance of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period during which the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears (all The chance button 136 vibrates during a period, or during a partial period such as the first period. In the example shown in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A vibrates in the notice effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  In this example, the chance button 136 has advanced, but the chance button 136 may remain in the initial position and vibrate. The chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  Moreover, the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice effect may be changed according to the type of jackpot or the expectation of jackpot with probability change. For example, when the degree of expectation of jackpot with probability variation is high, a display mode (second display mode) in which a fan is spread out and danced may be used.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a case where the player loses the effect while the effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the strong SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps.

  Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 19D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here is also an effect to judge whether or not to develop into a super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

  As shown in FIG. 19E, when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation effective period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest character 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19H, the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the main character and the enemy character. The background image of this duel scene corresponds to a background image of strong SP reach production. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not it will be a big hit is performed, and if the main character wins, the judgment result will show that it will be a big hit in the current symbol variation display become. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), an effect display e2 such as a flash overlaps with a display in which the lord and the enemy are cut off. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains in the initial position. In FIG. 19 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 is not vibrated. The effect display e2 in FIG. 19 (i) and FIG. 19 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 19 (k) where the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 19 (l) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 19 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judgment effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (m) displays a scene where the enemy role has won, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. Note that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20 (m) is in an off state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 20 (n), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” in a swinging manner on a plain background screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 20 (o), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of loses, is finalized and lost.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which an effect involving the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is executed through a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is achieved, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  In the following, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  After a judge effect (FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)) on whether or not to develop into super reach, in FIG. 21 (h), a strong SP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has A background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21 (i), an effect display e2 like flash is displayed.

  In FIG. 21, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down to the player side. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing of FIG. 21 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmission part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission part 191 is rotated forward, and the transmission part An arrow display 191b that suggests pressing 191 and a character display “push-in” and a remaining period meter display 191c that represents the remaining period for receiving the operation of the transmission unit 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” are collectively referred to as a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. This transmissive portion display 191X corresponds to an example of a first notification. It should be noted that the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “push-in” may not be included, but the transmission portion display 191X may be used. For example, the transmissive part display 191X not including the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. Note that the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission unit display 191X, or the transmission unit 191 may be rotated forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even when the transmissive portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Moreover, although the transmission part 191 rotated forward is not oscillating, it may be oscillated. The effect display e2 in FIG. 21 (i) and FIG. 21 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is shown in FIG. 21 (k) from which the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification has started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the effect display e2 has started, or it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started from the time when the transmission portion 191 has been rotated forward. .

  FIG. 21 (l) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is pushed to the initial position at the timing of FIG. 21 (l). In this example, when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the family crest character 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 22 (m) following FIG. 21 (l). As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right toward the family crest character 247, and as shown in FIG. 22 (n), the pair of combined characters 248 sandwich the crest character 247 from the left and right, Combine with family crests. The effect that suggests that the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B has turned forward may be a big hit, or the effect that suggests that the crest member 247 has fallen becomes a big hit. It may also be an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of combined objects 248 with the family crest member 247 is a big hit. It should be noted that only one type of examples among a plurality of types of examples suggesting to be a big hit listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, All types may be applied. After that, first, the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (o)), then the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judge production is displayed in a state where there is no obstruction.The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 22 (q) displays the scene where Tono-sama won, and the judgment result here In this scene where the judgment result of the final judge performance is displayed, the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. However, it may be a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “333”), that is, the combination of decorative symbols is displayed with the display of the final judgment result. Ri, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  It should be noted that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22 (q) is in an unlit state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

  When the final judgment effect is finished, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 22 (r), “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” fluctuates on the background screen where the lords gather. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed as a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 described above, the family crest actor 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIG. 21 (f) to FIG. 21 (g)). Although the crest actor 247 operates in the final judge production (FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (o)), the crest actor 247 is not operated before the final judge production. The operation may be performed only in the judgment effect.

  In this example, there are scenes (FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (l)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 serving as the operation unit A starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 serving as the operation unit B. In FIG. 23, alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). After the operation promotion notification transmissive part display 191X shown in FIG. 23 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (l), the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate without permission (see FIG. 23 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts to vibrate simultaneously with the start of the final judge effect, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 23 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 23 (p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 23 (q), there is a case where it is not vibrated and the judgment result can be noticed. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect ends. In this case, the chance button 136 always vibrates during the entire period of the final judge effect. In addition, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect ends, and the initial position of the operation promotion notification to the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect ends. The display 136X may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is oscillating as part of the final judgment effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23 described above, the final judgment effect in FIGS. 23 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and the notice effect is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the chance button 136 that vibrates was not operated, but when the chance button 136 that vibrates during the execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued. In accordance with the operation, first, the family crest character 247 and the combined character 248 return to the initial positions, and then the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the earlier the judgment result can be viewed. Note that when the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judgment effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the chance button 136 (second operation means) vibrates during execution of the final judgment effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 23, FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 18 (m) is not started. Also, the effects (second effects) shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) are configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. Production.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is also operated after the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B is operated. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transparent portion 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 24 (l)). That is, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  In this example, after the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation means A is pushed down this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts oscillating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts oscillating in response to the pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when the predetermined longest vibration time has elapsed since the start of vibration, the chance button 136 ends the vibration even if it is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 24 (r1)) even when the final judge effect is finished and the shaking fluctuation display is started, but the shaking fluctuation display is started. After a while, the longest vibration time has been reached, and the vibration has ended even if it has been pressed (see FIG. 24 (r2)). The longest vibration time corresponds to 6 frames in FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (r1). The fluctuation display continues for a while after that (FIG. 24 (r3) to (r4) in FIG. 24), and the first time (FIG. 24 (r2) to 3 (r4) in FIG. 24 (r4)) after the chance button 136 does not vibrate. As shown in FIG. 24 (s), “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” are confirmed and displayed as a big hit. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIG. 24 (r1) to FIG. 24 (r4).

  In the example in FIG. 24, it can be seen that the final judgment effect has been started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest member 247 falls. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 24 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of the case where the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 25 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c in the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmission part 191 is operated with a delay of one frame from the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (l2)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judgment effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses is also 1. Shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the longest vibration time corresponds to six frames in FIGS. 25 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (r1). The fluctuation display is continued for a second time after the chance button 136 does not vibrate (a time corresponding to two frames in FIG. 25 (r2) to FIG. 25 (r3)), and then in FIG. 25 (s). As shown, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is finalized and a big hit. As described above, the fluctuation display is a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 24, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 25, the display shown in FIGS. 25 (r1) to (r3) is performed. ) For three frames, and the execution period of the fluctuation fluctuation display is shortened by a delay of the timing for operating the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B vibrates when the casing vibrates. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 26 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (k), the transmission part 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at the second position (front inclined position) rotated forward from the initial position (first position). Yes. Even though the transmission part 191 itself does not vibrate, the transmission part 191 vibrates when the casing to which the transmission part 191 is directly or indirectly attached vibrates. The casing here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmission unit 190. In this example, in addition to the transmissive portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 26 (k), the operation of the transmissive portion 191 can be urged by the vibration of the transmissive portion 191. In FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing is finished. This time, when the chance button 136 as the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

  Note that the vibration of the housing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may start when the transmission part 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission part 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may be started from the point in time, or may be started when the transmission part 191 is not operated even after the first time has elapsed after the transmission part 191 has reached the forward inclined position. Further, the vibration of the casing, that is, the vibration of the transmission part 191 may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may end when the transmission part 191 is pushed a little from the front inclined position. Even if it is pushed in, it may continue to vibrate during the first vibration period after the vibration is started or returned to the initial position, and there may be a period during which it vibrates with the chance button 136.

  Similarly to the transmissive portion 191 in this example, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A is also, for example, a housing (for example, a chance button 136 attached directly or indirectly, even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate). The ball storage tray door 108) may vibrate when vibrated.

  Furthermore, the transmission part 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction.

  FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), 24 (m) to (q), 25 (m) to (q), and FIG. 26 (m) to (q) described above. ) Is different from the aspect of the judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m) described earlier. That the mode of production is different means that the background screen is different, the characters appearing are different, or the colors of the displayed characters are different.

  Each of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 26 is an example of operating the transmission part 191, but instead of the transmission part 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmission part 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 27 shows different examples on the left and right sides.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect shown in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G). The state of FIG. 27A is the same as the state of FIG. 19K, and the initial position display 136X for the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (a) is within the operation effective period, and at the timing of FIG. 27 (a), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judgment result of the final judgment effect is not displayed immediately, and the family crest member 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. As the image changes, the background image changes. Further, in this example, as the family crest member 247 falls, the transmission part 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 27C). Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the crest character 247 is sandwiched between the pair of combined characters 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined characters 248 and the crest character 247 are combined, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27 (o), the transmission portion 191 is rotated again from the initial position to the forward inclined position in a state where the pair of combined characters 248 is returned to the initial position and the crest character 247 remains. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position again.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, the final judgment effect is started, and at the same time, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B repeats the rotation between the initial position and the forward inclined position. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or can be seen as a production different from the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21D to FIG. 21J). The state of FIG. 27A is the same as the state of FIG. 24K, and the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmission part 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. doing. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (i) is within the operation effective period of the transmissive part 191, but in this FIG. 27 (i), not the transmissive part 191, but the chance button 136 that remains unlit at the initial position is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, as in the example in which the transmission part 191 on the left side of FIG. 27 is operated, the final judgment effect is executed, and the transmission part 191 has the initial position and the forward tilt position. Strong vibration that repeats the rotation between. In other words, the transmitting portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position in FIG. 27 (b), rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in the same figure, it rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27 (i) is operated, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a scene where the enemy role wins is displayed once through a strong SP reach effect but is a big hit by a resurrection effect. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

  The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and after the judgment effect (FIG. 28 (d) to FIG. 28 (g)) on whether or not to develop into super reach, FIG. 28 (h) Then, the strong SP reach effect is started, and in the same figure (i), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 28 (j), in the state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At this timing, the effect display e2 disappears, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 remains in the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 28 (l), the transmission part 191 is pushed. In FIG. 29 (α) following FIG. 28 (l), the scene where the enemy role similar to that of FIG. 20 (m), which seems to be the judgment result of the final judge performance, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, As shown in 29 (β), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 3” is temporarily started.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (γ), a sign is displayed when the restoration effect is started, and the restoration effect is executed from FIG. 29 (m) to FIG. 29 (p). The revival effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (p), and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 Appears.

  When the rebirth effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (r), the fluctuation variation display of the big hit combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is immediately started, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the big hit combination “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” is fixedly displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 29 (α), which was considered to be the judgment result of the final judge effect, is a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136 that is the operation means A nor the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B vibrate, but the display of the duel result (display of the judgment result of the final judge effect) is displayed, whether true or false. If it is certain that a big hit will be made at the displayed timing or after that, if the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191 vibrate, it will be a big hit for the advanced player. There is a case that the interest of the game is improved. That is, the judgment result (true result) of the final judgment effect may be notified using the vibration of the chance button 136 or / and the transmission part 191.

  In this example as well, there were scenes (FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l)) where the transmission part 191 was operated, but instead of the transmission part 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the third effect in stages. In FIG. 30, the alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, the reach effect is started. In this example as well, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation that is a kind of button effect is started. An effect involving the operation here is also a kind of judge effect, and is a notice effect that judges whether or not to develop into a super reach. In FIG. 30 (d), as an effect involving the operation, the transmission part 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmission part display 191X for the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. Note that the transmissive portion display 191X 'shown in FIG. 4D is a display having the same function although slightly different from the transmissive portion display 191X described so far. Note that the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position without vibrating.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the transparent portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period of the transparent portion 191, and in FIG. It will fall. Further, in FIG. 14F and the like, the background image has no pattern, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30F displays a shaded effect display e3. A part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest character 247. Here again, the fall of the family crest character 247 is an indication of the judgment result of developing into super reach, and then develops into super reach. The effect of FIG. 30F described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that starts in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 30 (d) to FIG. 30 (e)) where the transmission part 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission part 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the notice effect that starts in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 in a stepwise manner. The alphabetical drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG. 31 correspond to the alphabetic drawing numbers written in parentheses in FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21F). The judgment effect on whether or not to develop to super reach ends in FIG. 31 (g), and the super reach effect is started from FIG. 31 (h '). This super reach effect is an effect different from the strong SP reach effect and the weak SP reach effect described so far, and is the effect selected by the effect lottery. However, the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains ½ or more of the transmission part 191 rotated to the forward tilt position shown in FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (k). 23, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed. When the operation is performed at a timing when only less than ½ remains, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is executed. Also good. That is, even if it is configured so that one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. Good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 31 (h ′), a background image in which the main character is chasing a bad merchant is displayed. In FIG. 31 (i ′), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed. The Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (j ′), the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the effect display e2 is displayed at the timing of FIG. 31 (k ′). Instead, an operation promotion notification transmission part display 191X is displayed. FIG. 31 (l ′) is within the operation effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position.

  The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission unit 191, and in FIG. 31 (m ′), the townscape of the castle town is different from the background image shown in FIG. 22 (m). In the same manner as FIG. 22 (m), a family crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (n ′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, a family crest character 247 is sandwiched between a pair of combined characters 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and a pair of combined characters 248 and The family crest character 247 unites. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (o ′), the pair of combined characters 248 returns to the initial position, and the crest character 247 remains in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town. As shown in (p ′), the crest character 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the background image of the townscape of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state, the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (q ′), a scene where Tono-sama caught a bad merchant is displayed, and it is certain that the judgment result here is a big hit. The chance button 136 remains unlit at the initial position without vibration during the execution period of the final judgment effect shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), which corresponds to an example of the third effect. . 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), the final judge effects are shown in FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), and FIG. 25 (m). Unlike the mode of the final judge production shown in (q), FIG. 26 (m) to (q) in FIG. 26, they are not executed simultaneously with these final judge productions. Also, unlike the judgment effect modes shown in FIG. 17 (m) and FIG. 18 (m), the judgment effect is not executed at the same time.

  Further, in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), the chance button 136 that is unlit at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is It is not a so-called back button. Note that an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 31 (j ′) to FIG. 31 (l ′)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, a second chance button 137 or the like described later is used. Other operation means may be operated.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples described so far. FIG. 32 shows different examples on the left and right sides.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after a certain effect (the effect of FIG. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (j)). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136. This LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

  FIG. 32A is similar to FIG. 24K, etc., on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmissive portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmissive portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. It is moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136 as the operation means A does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judgment effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 32 (a), the final judge effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and the family crest character 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image changes. Until the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, the chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains unlit at the initial position without vibration, but after the push operation of the transmission part 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts to vibrate when operated. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be ended simultaneously with the end of the final judge effect, or may be ended before the end of the final judge effect. Even if the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 remains off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 is turned on or blinks here as well. Note that the lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (c), the final judgment effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a shaking fluctuation display. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judgment effect is finished, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, the LED lamp 139 is also lit or blinking here. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In this example as well, there is a scene (FIG. 32A) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32A, instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 that imitates the chance button 136 that lights in red and vibrates is included. An initial position display 136X ′ is displayed. The real chance button 136 is also lit red and vibrates. Even if the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is not vibrating is displayed, the real chance button 136 may be vibrating.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 shows four examples on the left side and one example on the right side. The example shown in the upper two on the left (the example shown in FIG. 33A and the example shown in FIG. 33A) also passes through a certain effect (the effects shown in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G). This is an effect that is not executed unless it is empty.

  First, in FIG. 33A, which is the first example, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene, and the lower left. The transmissive part rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmissive part 191 is rotated forward is displayed. Moreover, the character display showing that the glass button which points to the permeation | transmission part 191 is waiting is also made | formed. These transparent portion rotation images 191a and the standby character display then become a notice display that the transparent portion 191 that is a glass button rotates to the forward tilt position. When this notice display is made, thereafter, the transmission part 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward tilt position.

  In the second example, FIG. 33A, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33A, and the remaining period is displayed by digital display at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a notice display that the transmissive part 191 rotates to the forward tilt position. When the remaining period by the remaining period display reaches 0.00 seconds, the transmissive part 191 that is a glass button is moved to the forward tilt position. Always rotate until.

  In FIG. 33A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display means 209 is a liquid crystal display device that has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 that is the first display means, and is movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is operated with a button effect such as a final judge effect, movable characters such as a family crest character 247 and a pair of combined characters 248 operate, and the second display means 209 is moved to the initial position. The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display unit 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A may vibrate or the transmission part 191 may vibrate while the second display means 209 is operating or after the operation is completed. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 may be a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may vibrate in the overlapping state.

  FIG. 33A, which is a fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33A can perform stock display of the button image B, and here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B represents that one button effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 33A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B. The button effects corresponding to the remaining three button images B are executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the jackpot game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of jackpot rounds. Further, as the button effects corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

  Note that the second display means 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and the reliability of the pre-reading notice from the display mode of the button image B by the button operation. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also at this time, an operating means for receiving a button operation (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission part 191) may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (α), a button image 136a4 that imitates the chance button 136 in the off state, and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display that prompts the user to press and hold the chance button 136 for a long time. In addition, three characters are displayed as one set: a character display “Long press to save the meter” and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” will be collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification long press display 136L. The long press display 136L may be used even if the three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display “save the meter by long press” are not included. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, a level display L1 is also displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. This level display L1 is a display that is leveled up according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 33 (α) is 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and the level display L1 reaches the full tank level before the remaining period of the operation effective period is exhausted, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full tank level. Here, a transmission part 191 (not shown) which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transmission part display 191X for notifying operation promotion as shown in FIG. It is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation, but here, even if the operation is to repeatedly press a short period of time that cannot be said to be a long press (single press), Even a so-called continuous hitting operation that handles or repeatedly presses for a short period of time is treated as a long press operation. Note that even when a continuous hit operation is required, a long press operation or a single press operation may be treated as a continuous hit operation (the same applies to the following examples). Although not shown in the figure, when the transmissive portion 191 is pushed in during the operation effective period, the judgment effect is started.

  Next, an effect involving a so-called pseudo-ream will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-ream is also executed when “execute” is won by the execution possibility determination lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the special symbol variation display. However, in the pseudo-continuous effect, for one special symbol variation display (that is, one start prize). The decorative symbol display is temporarily stopped in some or all of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the decorative symbol update is stopped but not yet confirmed, and is shaken. Or the like, the display may be re-variably displayed once or a plurality of times. For example, while the decorative symbols are updated (variable display) in the middle symbol display region 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. Variation display may be started, or variation display of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in all symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then re-variation display may be started. In addition, when temporary stop is performed, symbols and designs other than decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo-continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for the symbol variation display of one special chart (that is, one start winning prize) is determined by lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Is done. The pseudo-rendition effect may be a jackpot notice effect (so-called normal notice effect) of the change, which predicts that the symbol change display of the special figure currently being performed will be a big hit, or the special effect currently being performed. It may be a reach notice effect for notifying the development to super reach with the symbol variation display in the figure. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big win will be given by the symbol variation display of the special symbol starting after the symbol variation display of the special symbol currently being performed. Regardless of the notice effect, as the number of re-variable displays increases, the degree of expectation (the reliability of the notice) increases, resulting in a hot effect. In addition, when a re-variable display is performed for the first number of times (for example, four times), a big hit decision or a super reach decision may be made. In the case of a pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variable displays increases as the symbol variation table of the special figure to be noticed approaches. For example, when the symbol variation table of the special chart after 3 times is targeted for the notice, the re-variation display is performed once in the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table of the first special diagram, and the second special diagram is displayed. In the quasi-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variable display is performed twice, and in the pseudo-variable effect in the symbol variation table of the third special diagram, the re-variable display is performed three times. In the pseudo-continuous effect in the symbol variation table, the re-variation display is performed four times.

  In the pseudo continuous effect, the first pseudo continuous notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. The first pseudo-continuous notification here is to notify that the pseudo-continuous production is started or that the pseudo-continuous production is continued. For example, any one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-continuous symbols”) among the combinations of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspond to an example of the first pseudo-continuous notification. To do. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) shown in FIG. 5B or a combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 2”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 6”). , So-called chance eyes), or other patterns or patterns. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of types of examples of the pseudo-continuous patterns listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be. Further, the first pseudo continuous notification may be a character display, lamp lighting, or sound output that is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. Only one of the multiple types of examples of the first pseudo continuous notification enumerated here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied May be.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving pseudo-ream step by step.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, a transparent display 191X for notifying the operation promotion is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 34A, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 serving as the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 34C shows that the operation is within the effective period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position. Then, according to the operation of the transmission part 191, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the transmission part display 191X disappears, and this time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts to vibrate at the initial position. In FIG. 34 (d), a pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 34 (d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous pattern N that has been displayed at the timing of FIG. 34 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo continuous pattern N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the effective period of operation, and when the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, the pseudo-continuous symbol N remains, and the temporary stop is made. In some cases, the pseudo position symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X, and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects shown in FIGS. 34D to 34F are judged effects indicating whether or not a temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 34 (f), the pseudo continuous symbol N remains, and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 34 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the fluctuating display, and the fluctuation icon c is also displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (g), the pseudo continuous symbol N disappears, and the update (revariation display) of the decorative symbol is started in all the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of the special figure is still continued, the first special symbol display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special Fig. 1 are in the variable display, and the variation icon c is also displayed. However, the start of re-variation display here seems as if the start of special symbol variation display has been performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (g) displays characters “× 2”. Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when viewed as a special symbol design variation display, it looks like the second special symbol design variation display due to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. In the meaning of representing, “× 2” is displayed. That is, the character display “× 2” is a notification representing the number of times related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. This character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of a second pseudo continuous notification.

  In FIG. 34 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop is performed in FIG. 34 (f) is continued, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position by rotating to the forward inclined position, the second temporary stop judgment effect is started.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 34 (b) to FIG. 34 (c)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing in stepwise examples of other effects involving pseudo-ream.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, a transparent portion display 191X for notifying the operation promotion is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to display fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 35A, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission part 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. Further, the transmissive part display 191X whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b) overlaps the gray temporary pseudo-continuous pattern N ′ whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b). As a result, in FIG. 35B, a part of the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ is also displayed.

  FIG. 35 (c) is within the operation effective period, and when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, a judgment effect is started according to the operation of the transmission part 191. The judgment effect here is when the transmissive part 191 is operated, the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary tentative pattern N ′ is changed from the gray tentative pseudo continuous pattern N ′, and the temporary stop is performed. Even if the transmissive part display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′ does not change to the pseudo-continuous symbol N, but disappears to the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N ′, and temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG. 35 (d), the temporary stoppage is changed to the white pseudo-continuous pattern N and the first temporary stop is performed. Although the change from the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N 'to the pseudo-continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, it may be changed to a completely different symbol. It should be noted that both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35D and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are displayed during the change, and the change icon c is also displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission unit 191 is operated, that is, the result of the judgment effect shown in FIG. 35D is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is extinguished at the initial position without vibrating. However, the chance button 136 may start to vibrate at the initial position according to the operation of the transmission part 191, or may start to vibrate while moving forward, or start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned on or blinked.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. 35 (c)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′) are modified examples of FIG. 35 (b) to FIG. FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′) show the roaring effects that the temporary stop has not yet started and the pseudo-continuous effects may be started. That is, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo continuous symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35 (b '), the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c'). The chance button 136 may start to vibrate before FIG. 35 (b ′). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d '), and the temporary stop is performed. On the contrary, in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. As described above, the effects shown in FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′) involving the chance button 136 as the operation means A are a kind of judge effect and correspond to an example of the second effect.

  FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″) are modified examples of FIG. 35 (b ′) to FIG. 35 (d ′). In FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A vibrates, but in FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″), the chance button 136 is. Is not oscillating, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a transparent portion display 191X for an operation promotion notification. Further, also in FIG. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″), as in FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), the roaring effect that may start the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. ing. Then, the transmission portion 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transmitting portion 191, the second pseudo-continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo continuous symbol N. On the contrary, here, the pseudo-continuous symbol N may disappear in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, and in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started. Also in this example, when the judgment effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transmission portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the temporary operation is temporarily performed according to the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo continuous symbol (second pseudo continuous symbol N2) different from the pseudo continuous symbol to be stopped temporarily stops.

  The description of the specific example of the effect so far has been an example in the symbol variation display of the special symbol, but the same applies to other than the symbol variation display of the special symbol.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which a big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shaking fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game, and FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 36 (a), the fluctuation variation display of the combination of “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” with no probable big hit (normal big hit) is performed in the center area of the background screen where the lords gather. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the shaking fluctuation display. The promotion effect here is a jackpot type promotion effect (probable change promotion effect), and as shown in FIG. 36 (b), on the background screen where the lords gather, the fluctuation fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left. At the same time, an operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed in the central area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. The probable promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect.

  FIG. 36 (c) is within the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the fluctuation variation display of the combination of decorative symbols is redisplayed. In this example, the probability change promotion has failed and, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), a jackpot without probability change (ordinary jackpot) of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which is an even combination of decorative symbols The fluctuation fluctuation display of the combination of is displayed. On the other hand, when the probabilistic promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of the odd-numbered decoration symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) is redisplayed. The However, whether or not it is a big hit with probability change is determined by the determination of winning or not (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether success or failure of the probability change promotion here is according to the determination of whether or not winning (winning) at the time of winning The same applies to the probable promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. After that, the display is fixed and displayed in the combination of the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the swing variation display in FIG. 36D (see FIG. 36E).

In FIG. 36 (f) following FIG. 36 (e), a big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested to make a right-hand hit, and a hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the number of consecutive big hits is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “first time” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. The probable promotion effect here is also a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect. In FIG. 36 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position and prompts the user to press it. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b as a prompt display for prompting a continuous operation of the chance button 136, and “continuous hitting”. Three characters are displayed as one set, a character display of “shiro” and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Let's hit repeatedly” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification repeated hitting display 136R. Note that the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display “Randomly hit” may not be included, but may be displayed as a continuous shot 136R. For example, the continuous hitting display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.
In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L2 is a display that is leveled up according to the number of consecutive hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 36 (h) is 0 level.

  After that, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the remaining period of the operation effective period disappears in FIG. 36 (i). In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the level display L2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached three levels, but has not reached the MAX level. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (j) following (i), the continuous hitting display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and a character display of “defense failure” indicating failure of probability change promotion is displayed.

  Furthermore, during the jackpot game started in FIG. 36 (f), as shown in FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 36 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. In addition to the display, a character display “Push it in and return to life” is also made, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect is also started here. This button effect is an effect of judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) can be aimed at a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is ready for winning. The chance button 136 that is the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 37 (l) is within the operation effective period of the transmission part 191, and the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position. In response to the pushing operation of the transmission part 191, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to vibrate at the initial position. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Further, although the chance button 136 has started to vibrate, there may be cases where the vibration does not start.

  Furthermore, the production movable body (movable accessory) operates in accordance with the pushing operation of the transmission part 191. That is, the family crest character 247 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then a pair of combined characters 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. The pair of combined characters 248 and the family crest character 247 are combined with each other.

  Next, the family crest character 247 and the pair of combined characters 248 return to the initial position, and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (n) displays the result of the judgment effect. A character display of “successful survival” indicating that a winning is possible is displayed. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 37 (m), it may be vibrated at this timing. In addition, an asterisk with a letter “GET” is also displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 37 (n) following FIG. 37 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and aims at a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening). Character display is made. In FIG. 37 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of “V Aim”, and the game ball passes the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in (q) in the figure, the letter “V” is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, wins the specific winning opening V, and shifts to a certainty state (for example, after the big hit game is over). ) Is informed. Then, an end effect of the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 37 (r)), and the jackpot game ends.

  In this example as well, there are scenes (FIG. 37 (k) to FIG. 37 (l)) where the transmission unit 191 is operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  Next, the back button effect in which the start timing is changed by an operation will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38A is a diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those described above. In addition, description of items that have been described so far may be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38A has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance buttons described so far are referred to as a button A or a first chance button 136, and a chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as a button B or a second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position separated by LA from the ball launching handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), while the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball launch handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another point of view, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the horizontal center of the pachinko machine 100 than the button A (second chance button 136). Yes.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Similarly to the first chance button 136, the button B (second chance button 137) is a kind of movable means, can be vibrated, and can be advanced (protruded). On the contrary, only the button B (second chance button 137) is not a movable means and may not vibrate and may not advance (protrude). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not include a chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons such as a third chance button, or an operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, the button B (second chance button 137) illustrated in FIG. 38A can be applied instead of the transmission unit 191 described as an example of the operation unit B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied in place of the transmission portion 191. However, since the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, it is necessary to provide a vibration function. There is.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed.

  In FIG. 38 (b), the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212. The decorative symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. In FIG. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, notification that the operation is in an effective state (for example, red lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138) or operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, initial position display 136X). ) Is not performed, and the player cannot know that the operation is in an effective state. However, a person who knows from the information such as a bachinko magazine that the operation may be in an effective state when the reach production is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. This corresponds to a so-called back button.

  Note that not only the button A (first chance button 136) but also the button B (second chance button 137) or the image C of the cut-in notice by the character is displayed in response to the operation of the transparent portion 191. You may be made to do.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect in stages.

  In each figure in FIG. 39, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are arranged vertically on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), four black circle hold icons, which are the hold display in FIG. 1, are displayed, and no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. .

  In FIG. 39 (b), the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. Further, the hold icons are reduced by one and displayed three (hold icons h1 to h3), and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 39 (c), reach production is started. Here, the button effect is started in response to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39 (d) starts to light red. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (d), a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has begun to light red, and a button B (second chance button 137). ) As a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of), a character display of “PUSH”, and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation effective period of the button B (second chance button 137) Are displayed as a set. Hereinafter, the three images 137a, 137b, and 137c and the character display “PUSH” are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification button B display 137X.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the operation promotion notification button B display 137X is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X for promoting operation is reduced by about 1/5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 39 (f)). ). Note that when the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, the state returns to the off state. The effect in which the image C of the cut-in notice is displayed according to the operation of the button B is the button effect and corresponds to an example of the fifth effect. The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character is an effect display displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbols. Further, the button B display 137X for the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of a third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e)) is the first. It corresponds to an example of three periods.

  The display of the cut-in notice image C by the Tono-sama character (fifth effect) may be an effect that does not start unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, when the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, when the effective operation period of the button B has elapsed, it may be an effect that starts when the button B has elapsed, The effect to be started may be used. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Further, after the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. In other words, the second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137). Here, after the operation of the button B is performed for a while (time for one frame). Is started) and from FIG. 39 (g). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g), an image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character is still displayed, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the button A (first chance button 136). The initial position display 136X is not displayed. Further, the button A is in a state where the light remains off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. In response to the operation of the button A here, a character image G of “Intense heat” is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is certain that a big hit will be made in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and will show the judgment result of the final judgment effect. In addition, since it is an effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fourth effect that starts in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character “Intense heat” is different from the image C of the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character. Note that the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of being lost in the currently displayed symbol variation display is a character image of “sorry”.

  The second period started from FIG. 39 (g) is the operation effective period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the notification that the operation is effective is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display (fourth effect) of the image G of the characters “Intense heat” is an effect that does not start unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the cut-in notice image C (fifth effect) by the Tono-sama character may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button is displayed. If is not operated, the fourth effect is not started. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing at which the button A is operated and the timing at which the operation effective period ends.

  In this example, the execution period of the button effect in FIGS. 39D to 39G partially overlaps the execution period of the back button effect in FIGS. They may all overlap. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap at least in a part of the period. On the contrary, the effect period after the button operation for the back button effect and the operation effective period for the button effect may overlap at least in a part of the period.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 40, the timing of the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses coincides with the timing of the alphabetic figure number written in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the operation promotion notification button B display 137X is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40 (f)). As a result, compared to the example shown in FIG. 39, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period that starts after the passage of time is also shifted backward by one frame. In the example shown in FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. 40G, the button A is operated following the operation of the button B. At the timing shown in FIG. The operation of the button A here is accepted but is not treated as valid. Even if the player operates the button A at the timing of FIG. 40 (g), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all. Therefore, the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 40 (h). . In response to this second operation, the image G of the character “Intense heat” is cut-in displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 39 (FIG. 39 (g) corresponding to an example of the first time) is the start timing of the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 39 (b)). ) After four frames have elapsed (corresponding to an example of the first time), whereas the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (FIG. 40 corresponding to an example of the second time). (H)) is after the passage of five frames of time (corresponding to an example of the second time) from the start timing of the decorative display of the decorative symbols (FIG. 40B), and the start timing of the second period is Variable (undefined).

  Note that although both the example of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 are examples of effects related to the operation of two types of chance buttons, these effects are different from the operation means ( For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transmission unit 191 or the third chance button.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between the button A (first chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137).

  FIG. 41 shows two examples. In the example shown in the upper part, the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red and the button B (second chance button 136) is lit red. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a function to vibrate (first function), and the button B has a function to rotate (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts to vibrate. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

  In FIG. 41B, only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button B exhibits the second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of button B). Further, in this example, even when the button B137 is operated in the state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 41, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits a first function and starts vibration, and also exhibits a second function and starts rotating. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. It should be noted that the non-operation button B remains in a lit state.

  In FIG. 41 (B), only the button B among the buttons A and B is operated. Even if the button B is operated, the button B remains lit and neither vibration nor rotation starts. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exhibits a first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one of the functions (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed only by one operation (here, the operation of the button B). In this example, even if the button B137 is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates.

  Next, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.

  FIG. 42 shows three examples of promotion effects.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, during the display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 42A, the promotion effect is started simultaneously with the start of the reach effect or after the reach effect is started. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), a display item AT (first display) of noteworthy items appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42 (a), it is informed that attention is paid to the variation display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the state (“2 ↓ 2”) of the variation display of the decorative pattern in the reach state currently being performed is directly displayed to notify that attention is paid. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), the display item AT to be noted disappears, “decoration 7” is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. A state of being displayed is displayed. The symbol combination (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) in which the same even three decorative symbols are arranged is a normal jackpot symbol combination with no probability change, whereas the same odd ornamental three symbols are arranged. Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with probability variation, it is likely that the promotion with probability variation will be successful here. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, the attention object in the display AT of the matter to be noticed and the thing that changed after that match in the decorative design. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (a)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) match. In an effect in which a design such as a decorative design changes, a prior notice display related to the design may be configured so that the actual change display always matches.

  In addition, in the display AT of noteworthy items, the state of the variation display of the decoration pattern in the current reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed, but the variation display of the decoration symbol after the change is displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of the noticeable matter in the promotion effect, it is notified that the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons is focused. The four icons displayed in the notice item display AT are icons corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a kind of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. 42B, it is notified that the rightmost fourth hold icon h4 is noticed among the four hold icons displayed. It should be noted that, in the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42B, four hold icons are displayed, but no change icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, only the three black circle (default display mode) hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed, but in the variable icon display area 208e, a black circle (default The display mode) variation icon c is displayed. Further, in the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 42B, the notice mode of the fourth hold icon h4 to be noticed is changed to the hatched display form (the first display form and the display form of the pre-reading notice). It has changed. Next, in FIG. 42C, while still in the reach state, the display item AT to be noted disappears, and only the three black circle hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed. However, in the variation icon display area 208e, a variation icon c in a hatching display mode (normal notice display mode) is displayed. The display mode of hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display item AT of note in FIG. 42B, but in this example, the display item of attention is displayed in the display AT. The object (fourth hold icon h4) is different from the object (change icon c) changed thereafter. That is, in FIG. 42 (b), while the advance notice that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) is changed, the change icon c actually changes in FIG. 42 (c). Are different. In addition, the change icon itself is not displayed on the display item AT of note in FIG. 42B, while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Inadvertently, there is an inconsistency that is not displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 42B) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C) do not match. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual fluctuation shown in FIG. The icon c corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 42C corresponds to an example of the second display. In FIG. 42 (d), the decorative symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” loss is confirmed. In the variation icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the variation icon c returns from the hatched display mode to the black circle display. Further, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT (FIG. 42B) of the noticeable matters of the promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, and one of the four displayed icons is displayed. It is reported that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4). Further, the icon to be noted (fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatching display mode (first display mode). This hatching display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively low jackpot reliability. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons h1 to h4 having default display modes and a variation icon c having the same default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number of hold icons is the same between the display AT of the noticeable matter of the promotion effect and the actual hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42C, while still in the reach state, the display item AT to be noted disappears, and only the three hold icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although there is no, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is changed to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. This Tono-sama's face display mode (second display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice with a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, notable items (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of noteworthy items and those changed thereafter (first hold icon h1) are not only different, but also the change contents are hatched display modes. The first display mode is different from the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. Note that the fluctuation icon c of the default display mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 42 (C ′) is a modified example of FIG. 42 (C) and shows a state where the display AT of the matter to be noted shown in FIG. FIG. 4D is a diagram showing a state when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, following FIG. The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42C 'and (D') is the same as the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. The display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in (C ') and (D') 42 is not different from the display state of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 208e shown in FIG. FIG. 42 (D ′) following FIG. 42 (D ′) shows that the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 has been digested and a new variation display of the decorative symbol has started. FIG. When a new variation display of the decorative symbol is started, a moving animation of the hold icon shift display is executed, and the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 so far moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Displayed as a variation icon c. Further, the hold icon that has been the second hold icon h2 so far is displayed as the first hold icon h1, but at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or at the same time as the end of the movement animation. Or after the movement animation ends, the display mode changes to the display mode (second display mode) of Tonosama's face. That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) started after the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) in which the notice AT is displayed AT is performed. Promotion display is executed in the second symbol variation display). The first hold icon h1 that has changed to the display mode of the face of Tonosama may be displayed in the display mode during the execution of the second symbol variation display (for example, during the execution of the reach effect), and the display mode also changes. Or it may disappear when the super reach production is performed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the prior notice display (FIG. 42B) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C or FIG. 42E ') do not match.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 42C or FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in ') corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42C or FIG. 42E ′ is an example of the second display. It corresponds to.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples relating to the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed on the hold icon. This mini-icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and a notice of the effect executed in the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is digested or the big hit in the symbol variation display. Represents a pre-read notice. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and (B), a mini icon of A display is placed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 among the three displayed hold icons. Two mA are stacked. For example, the A-displayed mini-icon mA is for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production is started once. In the notice item display AT shown in FIG. 43B, one C-display mini-icon displayed on the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons. It is reported that attention is paid to mC. The C-displayed mini-icon mA is a pre-reading notice that suggests, for example, that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 43 (C), the display AT of the noticeable item disappears while the reach state is still present, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the mini icon mA and C display of the A display on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini-icon changes from the A-display mini-icon mA to the C-display mini-icon mC, but the lower mini-icon does not change, and the A-display mini-icon does not change. The icon mA remains. As a result, while the number of pseudo-continuations decreases from two to one, it is foretold that it will be a symbol variation display that is determined to be a big hit, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the attention object in the display AT of the attention item is a mini icon that displays only one item, but in fact, two mini icons that are displayed after that are displayed, Changes in the first stage mini-icon (C-displayed mini-icon mC) and the first-stage mini-icon (A-displayed mini-icon mA) that were the target of attention in the display AT of the noticeable item The contents are also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the C display mini-icon mC in the notice item display AT corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual first-stage A-display mini shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of a second icon. In addition, the display AT of the noticeable item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 43C corresponds to an example of the second display.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 43 executes a promotion effect selected from three types of promotion effects in the reach state. The three types of promotion effects here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D, and FIG. (C) or FIG. 42 (A) to (C ′) to the promotion effect shown in FIG. In addition, all of a plurality of types of effects (in this case, three types of promotion effects) for which one effect is selected are displayed in advance as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (c). )) And the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be of the same type, or a prior notice display (as shown in FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (d)). 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be an inconsistent type effect, or both a matched type effect and an inconsistent type effect are included. Also good.

  In FIG. 43 (b), a noticeable item display AT1 marked "promotion chance A" as promotion effect A, and a noticeable item display AT2 marked "promotion chance B" as promotion effect B; As a promotion effect C, a noticeable item display AT3 labeled “promotion chance C” is displayed, and any one type of promotion effect is selected and executed by internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed as if the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137) is operated.

  In the above description, the promotion effect has been described as an example. However, the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.

  Next, a timer notice for starting notification with a button effect will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a general timer notice.

  In each figure in FIG. 44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed beside the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 and the like has a circular operation surface, but the button B here has a square operation surface. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137 ′), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be named a chance button.

  In FIG. 44 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. 44A. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44 (a) are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 44B, the special symbol variation display of the special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variation display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B are lit, and only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fluctuation icon display area 208e, the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives a special symbol change start command or a special symbol hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol variation start command includes information representing the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started. Moreover, even if the information indicating the variation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. In the special figure hold increase command, when the main control unit 300 prefetches up to the variation time, information indicating the prefetched variation time is included, but even if not included, information indicating the prefetched stop symbol The first sub-control unit 400 can know the variation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. When the variation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to perform timer notice.

  When the lottery for whether or not to execute the timer notice is won (when the lottery result is a result to be executed), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is a kind of notice effect that suggests that a new effect is started. The new effect here may be a jackpot notice effect or a notice effect as to whether a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect or the like) is started. Note that the jackpot notice effect includes a normal notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be given in the following symbol variation display. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example is a numerical display. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the display representing the remaining time listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. In FIG. 44D, a timer notice display T is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and it is informed that the remaining time is 30:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (f), a Tono-sama character is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. Note that the variation icon c in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the variation icon display area 208e in FIG. Further, a timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) here is the end of the timer notice. Production. However, the first effect display (the character display of Tono-sama) can also be viewed as the start effect of a new effect that has been predicted to start with a timer notice. In particular, the timing when the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment when it becomes 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. Alternatively, the timer notice is ended when the time reaches 0:00 seconds, but the timer notice display T may be in a mode that continues to be displayed for a certain period even when a new effect is started.

  In FIG. 44 (f) following FIG. 44 (f), although the timer notice display T has disappeared, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N 1) is still displayed on the change icon display area 208 e. A normal notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this normal notice effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, has changed to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit with the symbol change display currently continuing in the reach state Is foretold.

  In FIG. 44 (h), the first effect display (tono character display) also disappears, and the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face continues to be displayed in the change icon display area 208e. continuing. After this, it evolved into a super reach production, and the change icon c disappeared (not visible) together with the hold icon, and it became a big hit or lost, and further, it was lost without developing into a super reach production. To do. Even in the case of development to a super reach production, the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may continue to be seen without disappearing.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which a timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the timer advance notice execution lottery is won, internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol or before the start of the symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display, An internal count is started. The counter timer is set with a count value before starting and is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 45, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 45, a value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal count is started from FIG.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state (operation valid state) where the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received simultaneously with the start of the internal count or immediately after the start. However, even when the operation shifts to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the button A operation promotion notification (for example, initial position display 136X) is also performed. However, the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed in accordance with the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated a while after the reach effect is started (see FIG. 45C). The display of the timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, but is irrelevant in this example. Also, the button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Note that the timer notice display T is not displayed even when the button B (the operation button 137 ') is operated, but it may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e), a timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time is 20:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is immediately displayed, so that the player starts counting down the remaining time as if the button A is operated. Internally, the countdown of the remaining time starts before the button is operated.

  In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button, but an operation promotion notification that promotes the operation of the button A may be performed. Ends when is operated. Therefore, when a certain period is provided between the time when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the time when the timer notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is not made during that period. Will not be done.

  In addition, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the button A operation, the length of the remaining time at which the display starts is different depending on the timing of the button A operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 45A, if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the timer notice display T is displayed from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, even if the button A operation is performed after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 is less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A operation is not performed. May be. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  Since FIG. 45 (f) and subsequent figures are the same as FIG. 44 (e) and subsequent figures, description thereof is omitted. However, since button A (first chance button 136) is a back button, the beginner does not press button A. In some cases, the remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time elapses, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face without performing the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1). Similarly to the case where there is an operation, after the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the back button operation timing and the hold increase timing.

  In FIG. 46 (b), when the symbol variation display is started, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 2, and the internal count is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display here. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, it is determined that the timer notice is to be executed, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is enabled.

  In FIG. 46C, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In a state where the timer notice display T is displayed (remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in 46 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. These three hold icons h1 to h3 are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 46F), and as shown in FIG. 46G, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed on the variation icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Also, in this example, on the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1), a new effect to be started, that is, a new effect in which the start is announced by the timer notice is suggested, and a pre-read notice is given. It has been reported that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the prefetch notice is also determined in a control manner at the stage of determining whether or not the button notice can be executed. Therefore, if the second hold of special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display currently being performed, the look-ahead notice target is The winning portion after the timer is scheduled to be held for the second time (in this case, the third hold) cannot be subject to the look-ahead notification, but for the player, before the start of the new production It appears that all three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed on the screen are likely to be subject to a pre-reading notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 out of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from a black circle display mode (default display mode) to a ton-like face display mode. The pre-reading notice effect is started as a new effect noticed by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) continues to be displayed until the currently displayed symbol variation display is completed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (c ′), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and the number of holds in FIG. When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 46 (d) when the number of buttons is increased by one (see FIG. 46 (e ′)), this is a button operation after the increase in hold. Therefore, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which was increased before the button operation, will also be subject to the pre-reading notice, but the hold increase after the timer notice is decided to run even before the button operation. However, in terms of control, the third hold cannot be a prefetch notice target, and in this example as well, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the prefetch notice display mode.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display one time before the symbol fluctuation display that is currently being performed, if the first hold is increased together with the second hold of the special figure 1, the first hold icon h1 There is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and in this case, it is not known in advance whether the prefetch notice target is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  Further, if the control for determining the pre-reading notice target is adopted according to the operation of the button A, the number of the pre-reading notice objects changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the pre-reading notice, but in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (e ′), from the first hold to the third hold. Will be subject to pre-reading, and the target that can be expected will differ depending on the timing of button operation.

  Furthermore, the pre-reading notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing two examples of button effects in stages.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the reach state from FIG. 47 (a) to FIG. 47 (d) is shown, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (b) is a button that imitates the chance button 136 in the off state at the initial position. 3 of an image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c representing a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as a set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of “press” are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47C, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state where the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, an image C1 of a cut-in notice displayed as a chance is displayed.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of timer notice is waited. 47A to 47C are the same as FIGS. 47A to 47C, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer notice is not executed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, each variable time is calculated from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol included in each command. If there is a hold whose fluctuation time is longer than the first time among these three holds, stock the timer notice until the hold is consumed and the symbol change display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 47C, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation effective period, the timer notice is not started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. As a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol change display to be started, as shown in FIG. 4D, the display T ′ “waiting” is set to the position where the timer notice display T is displayed. When the timer notice starts, the remaining time is displayed instead of “waiting”.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side, and two examples are shown on the right side.

  First, in FIG. 48A as the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter referred to as a time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T at the button A. (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also displayed as a countdown with the passage of time. In FIG. 48A, 10:00 seconds are displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48 (a) is 30:00 seconds, and they do not match. The button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated at the timing of FIG. 48 (b) when the counter timer 412 becomes 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the time display T1 is displayed. The timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

  48A, which is the second example, similarly to FIG. 48A, which is the first example, the time display T1 is positioned at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 has reached 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 48B is the same as the counter timer 412 at 25:00 seconds. On the timer notice display T, the difference between the time displayed on the time display T1 and the time displayed on the timer notice display T newly displayed is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 48B, the time displayed on the time display T1 should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, a difference display T2 of “+20” is made.

  48A, which is the third example, similarly to FIG. 48A, which is the first example, the time display T1 is positioned at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first Chance button 136) Already displayed before operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), and again here is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the characters “LOCK” are displayed so as to overlap the upper portion of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown at the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display “LOCK” is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds of the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display “LOCK” disappears and the time display T1 is replaced with the timer preview display T. Thereafter, the countdown as the timer preview display T is continued. The In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, eventually reaching 0:00 seconds, The process ends without replacing the display T.

  In the fourth example shown in the upper right, FIG. 48 (α), an arrow indicating the passage of time is displayed, indicating a state in which the symbol variation is being displayed. In general, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. In addition, when the timer notice notifies the start of the final cut-in notice in the current symbol variation display, the longer the timer notice execution time (remaining time), the longer the various notices are executed. Is possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-continuation. In addition, after the normal reach is started, the development to super reach (SP) and the effect of changing the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a chance-up production during the reach that raises the expectation of the big hit. For these reasons, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed internally, but the display of the remaining time in the timer notice display T is initially displayed slightly, and the countdown is temporarily displayed. There is a case where the interest of the game is improved by stopping or adding the remaining period later. In addition, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48 (a) is displayed, the number of times that the expectation is changed in the production when the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds increases. There are cases where the interest of the game is improved. In the final cut-in notice, a character that is determined to be a big hit is made to appear. Note that even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds when the counter timer 412 becomes 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to make a false timer notice.

  In the fifth example shown in the lower right of FIG. 48A, the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here. In this case, a timer notice display T displaying “30:00 seconds” is displayed. In FIG. 48 (i), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in the second mode (for example, a double frame). Note that the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example where the timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

  FIG. 49 shows two examples, and the example shown above is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the island simultaneous performance. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), “25 seconds until the simultaneous island effect” is displayed large. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (b), “20 seconds until the simultaneous production of islands” is displayed in the same size as before. In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer notice becomes 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous effect is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer notice is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous effect. The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412 without receiving any.

  The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, the mission display M is displayed on the upper right side of the variation icon display area 208e, and the remaining time is displayed as 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49A, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A timer notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 49A, it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display form surrounded by a single frame, so there is a risk of misunderstanding at first glance. It also has the effect of being viewed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer notice display is not a numerical display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) is lit red. And urge you to operate. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (b) has a tutorial-like description about the display of a chance up meter, which is a kind of timer notice display. In FIG. 50 (c), the button A is operated in response to the red lighting, and the chance display meter 208 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation. The chance up meter CM has a start S at the left end and a goal G at the right end, and the arrow mark moves from left to right as time elapses. This arrow mark represents the current time point, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Furthermore, this chance up meter CM not only shows the remaining time, but also various changes such as pseudo-ream and hold icon changes, reach title color change effects, and chance up effects during reach as shown in FIG. The execution timing of the production is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the production is marked, and it may be hidden until what kind of production is executed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red, prompting the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N is marked with a mark JI. When the remaining period meter reaches the mark JI and operates the button A, a special mode effect is produced. Be started. In FIG. 50 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow, and the special effect is not started, and as shown in FIG. 50 (B), an image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed with the chance and black characters is displayed. Has been. In FIG. 50 (a), the operation timing of the button A matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (a), an image C2 of the cut-in notice displayed in gray letters with the chance is displayed. ing. The cut-in notice image C2 shown in FIG. 50 (a) differs from the cut-in notice image C1 shown in FIG. 50 (B) in that the typeface and background of the character are the same and only the character color is different. Different types of fonts and backgrounds may be used, or images such as characters may be added. In FIG. 50A, the button B (operation button 137 ') for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to a back button. The operation timing of the button B is also in time with the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (i), a special cut-in notice image C3 in which a princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect varies depending on the operating means to be operated. In addition, the display type of an effect is not restricted, and the kind and start timing of an effect may differ. Further, even when the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether or not the button is the back button.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209 'with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. A panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209 '. In the shutter timer notice display means 209 ′ shown in FIG. 51 (a), the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209 ′.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 'becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first effect display (Tono-sama character display N1) is displayed not on the timer notice display means 209 ′ but on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the decorative symbol display device. In the variation icon display area 208e of 208, the variation icon c changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and the normal notice effect is started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'continues to display 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A) displays the same display as “standby” shown in FIG. 47 (D). “During standby” shown in FIG. 47 (D) is a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol variation display started after this, but “waiting” shown in FIG. This corresponds to a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. In FIG. 51 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 ′ opens, and the remaining time set to the counter timer 412 not shown here is the same as the remaining time. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The cancellation of “waiting” may be canceled automatically when the cancellation time comes, or may be canceled by operating the button A or the button B again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51A, the timer is in the reach state, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (here 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. A notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display means 209 ', the shutter is opened and the characters "chance" are displayed. As described above, the timer notice display unit 209 'can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208. Instead, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) (here, 20:00 seconds) is replaced with the timer notice display means 209 ′. Is displayed. In this way, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped by the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209 '. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 ′ displays 24:95 seconds, both of which are not shown in the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although the remaining time is supposed to be displayed, there is a slight difference. This is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ′, so that some time lag occurs in display control or the like, and this is the difference due to this time lag. Note that a difference may be intentionally generated as part of the production between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 '.

  Here, the timer notice display means 209 'is used here, but instead of the timer notice display means 209', a second display means 209 capable of operation (up and down) shown in FIG. 33 may be used. The second display means 209 may always operate (elevate), may not operate (elevate), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or performs only the elevating operation. It may be a thing.

  Finally, an example in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively start changing will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step-by-step how the decorative symbols are varied and displayed with the hold icon animation being executed.

  In FIG. 52 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the losing (determined display). "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (a) are lit three times, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle hold icons, which are the hold indications of special figure 1. Therefore, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a state immediately after the special symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol update (variable display) is continuously started in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. While only two first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (b) are lit, there are three hold icons (hold icon) in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. h1 to h3) are displayed, and the fluctuation icon is not yet displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is a result of a time lag that occurs because it is immediately after the start of fluctuation. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the movement animation of the hold icon is started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then moves diagonally to the lower right, and the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until now moves toward the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2 so far, moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 is displayed, and the hold icon which has been the third hold icon h3 so far is the second hold icon h2. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (d), the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

  Here, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. Are lit. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts an increase animation of the hold icon, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (e) starts to see the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi from the bottom of the display screen.

  In FIG. 52 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon continues and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 52 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation is finished, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (h), the stop symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1, which is a round display, is changed to a stopped display (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. In 208e, the variation icon c still remains. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 52 (i), the final display of the stop symbol of the losing is performed, and the decoration design display device 208 also displays “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3”. The combination of the decorative pattern of the lost is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c is also disappeared.

  52 (j) to 52 (l), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is performed, and in FIG. 52 (m), the stop display is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (n) is displayed. Here, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed.

  52 (a) to 52 (n) described above are castle town stages, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the streets of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. At the same time as the symbol variation display of the next special symbol 1 is started in the diagram (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image as a mesh. It changes temporarily to a background image in which a princess character is displayed at the center of the tone background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to a stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon that has been displayed, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the variation icon c itself disappear, and the variation display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left. In addition to being displayed, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are only displayed on the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (p), the background image is switched to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, the castle town stage has been switched to the darkness stage. When the stage change is completed, the hold icon, the frame of the variation icon display area 208e, and the display of the variation icon c itself are restored, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is also performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right This is performed in the symbol display area 208c. In the castle town stage, the hold icon or the change icon whose default display mode is a round shape has a default display mode in a square shape in the dark stage. In FIG. 52 (p), the black square first hold icon h1 is displayed. Similarly, a black square variation icon c is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may change depending on the stage. In addition, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol may be changed according to the stage.

  In addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage, multiple stages are prepared as described above, and the stage changes according to the control state (eg, probabilistic state / non-probable state, electric support state / non-electric support state). Or a stage change is performed according to the number of symbol fluctuation displays.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon while the symbol is stopped.

  During the symbol variation of Special Figure 1, after the movement animation is completed, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is increased by one to three. In other words, the third hold is increased here. 53. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is increased by one and is lit three. Further, although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation for increasing the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53B has three hold icons h1. ~ H3 is displayed. The increased third hold is subject to a pre-reading notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (black circle display mode) during symbol variation in FIG. 53 (b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted, but unless otherwise specified, the increase animation is executed.

  In FIG. 53 (c), stop display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 15 (f), the decorative pattern of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” is lost. The combination of is displayed. During this fixed display, the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) increased during the symbol variation display is executed. In this effect, the display mode of the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h2) displayed when the third hold is increased is changed together with the increased third hold icon h3. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 53 (d) are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode), but in FIG. 53 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the effect display e4 overlaps these three hold icons h1 to h3, so that the three hold icons h1 to h3 cannot be visually recognized for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), all three hold icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). The change in the display mode here is simultaneous and the same change in the display mode. However, the display mode may change one by one or may change to a different display mode (hereinafter referred to as “display mode”). The same applies to the simultaneous changes described.)

  In FIG. 53 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 53 (h), the hold icon of the display style of Tonosama's face has started moving animation. Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the display mode of the face of the Tono-sama is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the form of the face of Tonosama are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the hold icon movement animation corresponds to an example of the first period. An effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed within one period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the period during the fixed display (FIG. 53 (d) to FIG. 53 (f)). Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when there is a hold increase while the symbol is stopped.

  In FIG. 54 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (d) to FIG. 15 (f), the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” are lost. The combination of is displayed. Since the fixed display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, the fixed display is also referred to as the stop display. During the stop display, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, the third hold is also increased here. 53. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 53 (f) are increased by one and three are lit. The third hold increased here is also subject to the pre-reading notice. In the case of the increase of the hold during the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation is cancelled. However, only a part of the increase animation may be executed, or the whole may be executed.

  In FIG. 54 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. It becomes invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 increases as shown in FIG. 54 (g). The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the display mode of the Tono-sama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, both of which have been displayed in black circles (default display mode) so far, are the display modes of the Tono-sama face (display mode of the pre-reading notice) Are changing at the same time. That is, all of the three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the face display mode (display mode of the pre-reading notice). In FIG. 54 (g), symbol variation display is started, and the subsequent processing is the same as the example in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, and the simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased hold icon is displayed. That is, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the increase in hold or with the increase in hold.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases by two during the symbol variation.

  FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c) show that the symbols are changing. Among these, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. 55 (b) after the moving animation ends. The number of holdings in FIG. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and this third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the prefetch notice execution lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is increased by one and is turned on three, and the third hold icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, and three hold icons are displayed. h1 to h3 are displayed. Further, at the timing of FIG. 55 (c) thereafter, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 is further increased to 4 (full tank). That is, the fourth hold is increased here, but as a result of the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, the fourth holding is not subject to the pre-reading notice. The first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 55 (c) are increased by one and turned on, and the fourth hold icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, resulting in four hold icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 55 (d) to (g), the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, the simultaneous change effect is executed as the effect of the third hold pre-reading notice increased during the symbol variation display, and the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 55 (f). After the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to visually recognize, the effect display e4 disappears and the hold icon display resumes as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold) that was already displayed when the third hold increased, together with the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode of the Tonosama's face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold is increased is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the black circle display mode (default display mode) remains unchanged. Thus, even if it is a simultaneous change effect, not all displayed hold icons change.

  Even in this example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the end of the hold icon movement animation is equivalent to an example of the first period. Simultaneous change production is performed within the period. On the other hand, there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period immediately before FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d)). The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during the symbol change, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the stop display period (FIG. 55 (d) to FIG. 55 (g)).

  In addition, the first half of the period from the start of the variation display of the decorative design (for example, the period before the start of reach production) is the first period, and the second half of the period until the end of the variation display (for example, the first period). The period of the latter half portion following (2) may be the second period. Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  Further, the first period may be a period from the start of display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, the period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e. It may be a period until one of a plurality of decorative symbols temporarily stops (so-called first stop or first temporary stop in pseudo-continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of variable display May be a period until the reach state is reached. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of hold increases while the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 56 (c) to FIG. 56 (g) show that the symbol is stopped, and among these, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. Increases by 1 to 3. In other words, the third hold is increased here, and this third hold becomes the target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (f) is increased by one and is lit three, but the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon The entire display area 208f is difficult to visually recognize. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase of the third hold is cancelled.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 56 (g), there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is further increased to 4 (full tank). In other words, the fourth hold is increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect that is the prefetch notice effect, but the fourth hold is not a target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (g) is increased by one and is lit four, but the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding is held. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the fourth hold is also canceled.

  In FIG. 56 (h), the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (h), the third hold icon h3 subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display form), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon are displayed. The icon h2 also changes to the display mode of the Tonosama face (the display mode of the pre-reading notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold has increased is a black circle display mode. (Default display mode). In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as a pre-reading notice effect. However, if there is an increase in hold during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, the hold The increase is excluded, and the hold icon before the simultaneous change effect is executed is changed all at once. While the symbols are stopped, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately when the special figure hold increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the start of the simultaneous change effect, the third hold If it is the target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. If the fourth hold is a target of the prefetch notice, the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in FIG. 56 (f) and FIG. 56 (g), the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect that is the pre-reading notice effect is reserved. An icon increase animation may be performed. In FIG. 56 (f ′), as in FIG. 56 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect due to the third hold being a pre-reading notice target, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed. It has become difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since it is after the start of the simultaneous change effect, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56 (g1 '), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is behind the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. 56 (g1 ′) following FIG. 56 (g1 ′), an increase hold icon hi having a black circle display mode partially hidden by the effect display e4 is shown.

  As an increase animation of the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold, an increase hold icon hi in the face display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) may be displayed together with the effect display e4.

  Next, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon in the winning order variation machine will be described.

  The explanation so far has been the explanation in the special figure 2 priority fluctuation. That is, it was an explanation of the increase in the holding of the special figure 1 in the case where the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 is given priority. Note that the same holds true for the increase in suspension in FIG.

  Here, about the case of the winning order variation machine which starts the symbol variation display from the winning timing among the winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the winning at the second special figure starting port 232. explain.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining winning order fluctuations.

  In the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight holding icons including the four holdings in the special figure 1 and the four holdings in the special figure 2 can be displayed. The variation icon display area 208e is provided in the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 57 (a), six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. All of these six hold icons h1 to h6 are in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 57 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. Here, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but the illustration is omitted. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIG. 57 (c) to FIG. 57 (d)). In this example, the simultaneous change effect of the losing and holding icon is not started in the lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice for the seventh holding is executed.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started. In FIG. Is completed, and a variation icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the hold increases in the winning order variation.

  In FIG. 58 (a), seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. These seven hold icons h1 to h7 are all in a black circle display mode (default display mode). The hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 58 (a) is a state after the movement animation ends.

  In FIG. 58 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change after the movement animation ends, and the eighth holding icon h8 is added to the holding icon display area 208f, and the holding is full. In this way, a full display F as a pending MAX is also made. In this example, the lottery for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice for the eighth hold is won, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is executed thereafter.

  Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the stop display is in progress (FIG. 58 (c) to FIG. 58 (d)). In this example, during the stop display, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

  Next, the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is digested, and as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the special figure display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is performed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started. In FIG. Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and a change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode) regardless of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the variation icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the moving animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears, but the effect display e5 here is a display that overlaps the variable icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f, as shown in FIG. 58 (h). In addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the fluctuation icon c is also difficult to visually recognize. In the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58 (h), the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed does not overlap, but may overlap to this position. Further, an effect display that does not overlap the variation icon display area 208e may be used.

  In FIG. 58 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon can be visually recognized, and the variation icon c can also be visually recognized. The simultaneous change effect here was a look-ahead notice targeting the eighth hold at the time of the increase in the hold (FIG. 58 (b)). In the first place, the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed. Accordingly, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the fluctuation icon c are displayed, and the display mode of all these displayed icons is changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display mode is not changed to one type of common display mode, but is changed to a plurality of types of display mode. In addition, the display mode of all the held icons that have been changed simultaneously may be different.

Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. FIG. 58 (d ′) is in a stop display as in FIG. 58 (d), and in FIG. 58 (e ′), as in FIG. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the previous example, the hold icon moving animation is started immediately after this, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display or immediately after the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Simultaneous change production has been started. In FIG. 58 (f ′), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are displayed, and all these displayed icons are displayed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example when the hold increases during the stop display in the winning order variation and the hold is full.

  59 (a) to 59 (b), a stop display is performed. At the timing between FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 1, the number of holds increases by 1 and the number of holds reaches 8 (full tanks) For the increase in hold during the stop display, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, as shown in FIG. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 increases by 1 and lights up four, and the eighth hold icon h8 of the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased. 58, the full tank display F described with reference to Fig. 58 is not displayed, that is, the full tank display F is displayed only while the symbol is changing. Is short and the full tank display F in a certain amount of time In this way, the next symbol variation display is started without displaying the full display F (see FIG. 59 (c)). After that, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started and the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59D). In FIG. 59E, the effect display e5 disappears and the seventh hold icon h7 is displayed. The first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6 and the variation icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all these redisplayed icons is changed.

  Note that the full tank display F may be displayed during the stop display even for a short time. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Furthermore, if the number of holdings does not increase during symbol variation or the holding full state is not reached, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icon may not be started.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the hold icon being displayed.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60 (b), the second hold icon h2 changes to a hold icon in the display form (second display form) of the characters “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a prefetch notice with the highest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. The rare display mode with the lowest appearance rate may be used. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the second display mode listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. Even if the hold increases while the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, it changes into the hold icon of the display mode (1st display mode) where the 2nd hold icon h2 is shining in FIG. 60 (B). This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a pre-read notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed at the same time. The display mode having the next highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples for the first display mode listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. When the hold increases in the state where the hold icon of such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 60C), if the increased hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice, simultaneous change An effect is executed (see FIG. 60E).

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a simultaneous change effect in a case where the reserve is full in the winning order variation.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) has changed to the display mode of the number-long character. The third hold icon h3 has a display mode changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, a case where a character with the longest character appears from the beginning at the time of winning a prize, or a case where the display mode of the character with the longest character is changed at the start of the next change. In FIG. 61 (d), the eighth hold icon h8 increases during the symbol change, and the reserve is full. If the reserve full tank is reached during symbol fluctuation, the full tank display F is displayed from the time when the tank is full to the stop display of the current symbol fluctuation display (FIG. 61 (c) to FIG. 61 (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the full tank display F disappears when the confirmation display is obtained. And even if it is a case where the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon is changing by another production, after a holding full tank, after the movement animation (refer FIG.61 (g)) of the holding | maintenance icon in the next fluctuation is complete | finished, The simultaneous change effect is started as shown in 61 (i), and the display mode of all the icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon c is changed as shown in FIG. . In this example, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. 60A to 60E, the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the hold full condition. . Accordingly, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is the display mode of the longest character, but even in the display mode of the “heat” character shown in FIG. 60 (b), When the reserve is full, simultaneous change effects are executed. However, even if the reserve is full, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed if the hold icon in the display form (second display form) of the characters “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 61 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the face of Tono-sama by the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full tank display F is displayed when the reserved full tank is reached during the symbol fluctuation. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again in response to the reserved full tank (see FIG. 61C). In other words, if the reserved icon whose display mode has been changed by the simultaneous change effect becomes full before all the held icons are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

  The example of the winning order variation machine described in FIG. 58, FIG. 59, and FIG. 61 can be applied to the case where the reserve full tank is reached even in the case of the special figure 2 priority variation machine or the alternating variation machine. It is an example.

  9 to 61 described above may be an example of a single pachinko machine, or may be an example executed by different pachinko machines.

  FIG. 62 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 63), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of medals can be made electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

  Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 157. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64 to 157 are used only in the description using FIGS. 64 to 157 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 157, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, Chance button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 64, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing of the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 67) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, The launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 67) that performs the control processing related to, and the power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 67) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are constructed. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 65), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 66 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 66 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 68 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 68 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 68A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. In FIG. 68 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 65 (indicating that there is an operation) If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 67. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set, indicating that data is set) in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (common figure A shown in FIG. 68 (c)) or the lost symbol (common figure B shown in FIG. 68 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. ROM 2306 is obtained based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 72A to 72C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. There is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 72B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 72B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, see FIG. 73 for the success / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 73A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination high probability table, and FIG. 73B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. In the case of determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if it is in the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 73A, and if it is in the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 73 (b). Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 73C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 74A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical value range of random numbers Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b), based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 75A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 75B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 75C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 75D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 76A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 76B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 76C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  77, there are a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary drawing. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  77 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 in FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 77 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 77 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 77 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 77 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started in FIG. 77 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 77 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 77 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P as shown in FIG. 77 (j). . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 77 (k), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 disappears and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the vehicle enters the reach state as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 77 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 77 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be the advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 in stages.

  In FIG. 78 (p) continuing from FIG. 77 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 78 (s). In FIG. 78 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 78 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the 15R probability variation big hit decision of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 78 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 78 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 78 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is made along with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, and 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 77 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 78 (t). In 78 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 78 (v ′) following FIG. 78 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 78 (w ′) following FIG. 78 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 78 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 79 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 79 (c), as in FIG. 78 (t), all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 79 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 80A is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 80B is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 81A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 81B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a carton box is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 80A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 80A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 80A) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 80 (a) is started, a Tonari-like effect appears in which the notice icon appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the notice icon. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 81 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icon for the first shrine icon I1 and the notice icon for the second shrine icon I2 are shown in FIG. 81 (a). And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 81 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), for example, a notice icon for a hat, a notice icon for a shuriken I7, a notice icon for a shuriken I7, and a ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura). In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 81B: erasure effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  82, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77. For example, the display result of the 4th symbol is displayed by the light emission mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 82 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Also, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 82 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-like character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 82 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 in stages.

  In FIG. 83 (14) following FIG. 82 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 83 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the carton box at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 83 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 83 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  After that, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 83 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  84 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 in stages.

  In FIG. 84 (28) continuing from FIG. 83 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watcher character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol display area 208b displays a pseudo-continuous symbol in which the Tono-like character is represented. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208 a, the middle symbol display area 208 b, and the right symbol display area 208 c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (34). That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 84 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 84 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”, and thereafter, in FIG. 84 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  85 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 in stages.

  In FIG. 85 (43) following FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), the above-described super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (45) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the advance notice icon I9 of the carton box together with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 85 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 85 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 85 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach production is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 85 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (55), as shown in FIG. 85 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the button image 136a. It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 in stages.

  In FIG. 86 (58) following FIG. 85 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 86 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 86 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 86 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 86 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 87 to 89 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 87 to 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  87 (8a) to FIG. 87 (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 a), there is an effect display in which the first icon-like notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (9a-2), after the first icon of the notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 87 (10a) is displayed. Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  87 (8b) to FIG. 87 (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8b), an effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 87 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8 c), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display is performed in which the hat warning icon I 6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 87 (9c), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  87 (7d) to FIG. 87 (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 87 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 82 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (8d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three hats thrown becomes the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot will be determined. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (easy to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d ′), a part or all of the three icons of the thrown three hats do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 87 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7e), unlike the example of production shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (8e), an effect display is performed in which a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notices executed can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notices can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9e ′), some or all of the three thrown notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  87 (12f-1) to FIG. 87 (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), as with FIG. 82 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 88 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the Tono-sama displays the notice icon I6 of the hat as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 88 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. The effect hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading notice light emission The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 88 (8 h), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  88 (8i) to FIG. 88 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 88 (8i), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9 i-2), the preview icon I 6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the pre-reading notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  89 (9 i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG.

  FIGS. 88 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 88 (8j) is different from FIG. 82 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the hat icon I6 held by the DJ character BY is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  88 (8k) to FIG. 88 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if Also, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in the carton box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 88 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 88 (12l ′) and FIG. 88 (12l ″), a part or all of the characters added and displayed on the notice icon is changed to a “question mark” to clearly show the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is determined is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the production example described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM and DJ character BY. However, in the production example shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 89 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), the display of the notice icon of the hat changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 89 (B1), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first icon notification icon design imitating the first icon notification icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the character notation “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the first icon of the notice icon changes to the first icon of the first notice icon I1 and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 93 are diagrams showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 90 to 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  90 (38m) to FIG. 90 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38) to (40). In FIG. 90 (38m) to FIG. 39 (m), the same effects as in FIG. 84 (38) to FIG. 39 (39) are performed, but in FIG. 90 (40m-1), the medium symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 90 (40m-2), the variable display becomes high speed immediately before the pseudo continuous symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol, and the pseudo continuous symbol appears. Is scrolled out to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-3), the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that the result of the stop display is a result of the deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  90 (23n) to FIG. 90 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (23) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 90 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  90 (23o) to FIG. 90 (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1). 90I is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 90 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIG. 90 (22p) to FIG. 23 (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (22) to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 90 (24q-1) to FIG. 90 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 83 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  91 (Aa) to FIG. 91 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing shown in 91 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 that has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 91 (B) shows an effect example when the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area as a plurality of notice icons are digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 91 (C) shows an effect example in the case where the digest effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the announcement effect of the announcement icon is increased. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), before the start of the effect of digesting the notice icon, an effect is given that indicates whether or not the notice icon is digested. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan warning icon I10 may be digested or the fan warning icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is deleted without being digested, the result is a stop display with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols, and the display result of out-of-range. You may alert | report.

  91 (59s) to (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59 s), two notice icons I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, it will be a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, they will be lost. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  91 (23t) to FIG. 91 (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this effect example, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 91 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 91 (28t) to (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed after digestion, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digest notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 85 (44), or only the digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 92 (Aa) to FIG. 92 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 92 (Aa), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the Princess Chibi character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. 92 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in accordance with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the chord character BC Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  92 (66u-1) to FIG. 92 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used for, for example, a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that informs that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probable big hit is confirmed, and when the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 92 (Ba) to FIG. 92 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and then the hold is digested and the symbol variation When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 92 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 92 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-2), a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified beforehand. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (hat notice icon I6) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 92 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted, for example, so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of notice icons may be digested, and a plurality of characters may appear correspondingly, so that the combination notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed. The reliability may be high.

  Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93 (Bc), a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. After that, at the timing of FIG. 93 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 digests is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 93 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 in stages.

  In FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 95 (14), the notice icon used for the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. Also, for the effects performed between FIG. 95 (14) and FIG. 95 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon of the first notice icon I1. 83 is the same as FIG. 83 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 95 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 95 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 95 (22), the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 95 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 95 (25), a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I 6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  95 (27) to 96 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. This is the same as FIGS. 83 (27) to 84 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34), the display of digesting the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 96 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged icon of the hat notification icon I 6.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents shown in FIG. 96 (38) to FIG. 45 (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 84 (38) to FIG. 85 () except that the notice icon displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46), the display that the first icon of the first icon displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time that the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand car boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is erased and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 96 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 97 (49). In this production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display in which a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the darkened background. In FIG. 97 (50-2), a character “NO” is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), a character display of “striking” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), as shown in FIG. 97 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 97 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 97 (59), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1” (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth display area YA4 of the notification icon is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 98 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 98 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 98 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit is confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon increase effect. 99 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 99 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 99 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  99 (8b) to FIG. 99 (b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8b), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 99 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I 1 but also three first lord notice icons I 1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown are notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. Further, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is unlikely to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 99 (9c ′), a part or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 99 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the character YM of the character uses the notification icon I1 of the first character as the notification icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 99 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display is performed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  99 (8g) to FIG. 99 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8g), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the first lord's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9 g-2), the first lord's notice icon I 1 acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetching notice An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  99 (12h-1) to FIG. 99 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), as in FIG. 94 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 100 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 100 (8i) is different from FIG. 94 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (9 i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and uses the first icon of the first lord with the notice icon I 1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 100 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 100 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 100 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified in text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ″), all or part of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is changed to the notice icon after change, and the notice icon after change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  FIGS. 101 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 101 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 101 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notification icon I9 of the Thousand Box is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notification icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 101 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 101 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with a first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after being overwritten is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 102, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the prefetch notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but displays it in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  And as shown in FIG.102 (C), in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the Princess Chibi chance effect is performed. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102 (D2), at least one of the hold icons of the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  As described above, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case of power interruption / recovery during display of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power interruption / recovery occurs while the notice icon is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 103 (B), a power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 103 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (C) displays a character display “Resume for a while” as a return display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 step by step. 104 to 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, in FIG. 104, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 104 (1) shows a display corresponding to the above-described FIG. 82 (5). However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. This is different from FIG. 82 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display region is formed above the reserved icon display region 281 and a three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 82 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (4). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (5), the thrown “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (7) to (8), a display is performed in which the character-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is circled.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIG. 104 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIG. 104 (7) to FIG. 104 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “mon” move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Since the contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 106 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 106 (a1) differs from FIG. 104 (5) in that the “mon” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 106 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is digested at the same time is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be enlarged and displayed in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 106 (b1) to FIG. 106 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (b5), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the crest character 224B once retreats to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it does not retreat to the initial position and the curling operation is continued. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The crest dropping effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 106 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  FIG. 106 (c1) to FIG. 106 (c2-3) show other examples of the notice icon digestion effect. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 106 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺”, the notice icon I32 for “princess” and The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen, and the face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 of “I” and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “To” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “爺” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with the face of the eyelid is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and the Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a spear character may appear and the Tono & Samurai reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, there is an example in which the presentation may be performed when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “Home” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “Crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested and changed to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM successfully draws the “monkey” notice icon I22, the family crest character 224B falls as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by the character YM of Tono-sama is cut and the pulling of the “monkey” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability with respect to the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the drawing icon “I22” of the “print” is successfully pulled. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the Tono-sama character YM is cut and the pulling of the “print” notice icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Also, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 for “Home” and the notice icon I22 for “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested, for example, “House” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is an increase in the notice icon and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 108 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). The hold icon h11) is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-read notice, shows how various parts are given. In FIG. 108 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows the state. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and a mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position, when the timing shown in FIG. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 108 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of the special figure 1 that is held is digested and the symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan-Sullet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is the first imitating the body part constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display form of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 108 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a holding icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted, for example, when a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 108 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 5, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach and is attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a variation of the digest effect in stages, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 in stages. 109 to 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 109 to 110 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 109 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (3), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed in the notification icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled, for example, the first decorative design display device. The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which Tono-sama's character YM has succeeded in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect effect will be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  FIG. 109 (7) is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208A with the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 109 (10), the first notification icon first in the notification icon display region 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (12). Is done. It should be noted that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (11) is displayed in the first decoration symbol display at the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

  In FIG. 110 (13) continuing from FIG. 109 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 110 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “continue”. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  Thereafter, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which the Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Note that in the case shown in FIG. 110 (16), the longest character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display straddling” is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and display is performed that moves downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19). Thereafter, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams showing another modification example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 111 to 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  111 (a1) to FIG. 111 (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. The notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111 (a3) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a4), after the notice icon I6 for the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the variable display of FIG. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, and “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is a result of the loss of both the first ornamental symbol and the second ornamental symbol. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 111 (a6-2) shows a state in which two pending reservations have been consumed and the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b4), the number of notice icon display is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) where the notice icon is displayed.

  111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b3) are the contents of the effects similar to those of FIGS. 83 (17) to (19). However, in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. That is, in FIG. 111 (b1), only one hat warning icon I6 is displayed in the warning icon display area 285, so that the warning icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. Yes. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b2), Tono-sama character YM has thrown three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. For example, the operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  112 (c1) to 112 (c9) are produced using two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 109 to 110. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 112 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is put on hold. The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. In addition, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. FIG. 112 (c1) At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 112 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 112 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . At the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c3), since the number of holdings is one, in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1, “1” indicating that is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is a chance, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 112 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. As the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the long-length character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (c9), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 112D shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 112 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (d), a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 113, the first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 113 (e1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 85 (47), which covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. That is, in FIG. 113 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and a notice is given to shift to a more reliable production. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move in directions close to each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decorative effect as shown in FIG. 85 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. And the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 113 (e7), the “decoration 1-decoration 2—over the second ornamental symbol display device 208I and the third ornamental symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon display area 285 is deleted, and the decoration of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” that fluctuates and fluctuates. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 113 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 113 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 113 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also rotates. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 114, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 114, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 114, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-1). At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. In other words, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be terminated after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chamberlet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides the light. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (f3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the thrown hat's notice icon I6 in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 114 (g) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 114 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 114 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of symbols is performed in the Chanletlet display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 114 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 114 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 115 (1) to FIG. 11 (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 85 (44) to FIG. 85 (54), only the parts different from those described above with reference to FIG. 85 will be described in detail, and descriptions of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 115 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 115 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. 115 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using the movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  116 (a1) to FIG. 116 (a3), when stocking the notice icon, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 116 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 104 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 116 (a2) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to a visually recognizable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visually recognizable position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 116 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 116B, effect movable bodies 224 </ b> Da to 224 </ b> Df that can rotate about the depth direction as a rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  FIG. 116 (c1) to FIG. 116 (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode is set. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 116 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the prefetching mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (c2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Preparing for special training” is displayed on the right side in the strip-shaped scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 116 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 116 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is ended, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that the special training reach is started is performed. Also, the effect movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, and then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise example showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. 117, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  FIG. 117 (1) is the same display as FIG. 104 (1) described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of production, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (3), but the hat's notice icon I6 is still not thrown, and FIG. 117 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (5), the hold symbols h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 held is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 117 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 118, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 118, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  118 (a1) to FIG. 118 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 118 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 118 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing a bowling effect as shown in FIG. 118 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the striked scene is displayed together with the text display of “Strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it has been stocked. In this way, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 118, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, when the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 118 (a2) may be displayed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c), if a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another modified example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game for holding each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. Also, in FIG. 119, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and the SB character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 119 (a 1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), the SB character SB is placed at any one of the three horizontal starting points of the horizontal line. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the character moves up to the next vertical line. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 119 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 118 (c) and (d), for example. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), it reaches the middle of the middle horizontal line.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 119 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating the acquisition is performed, the AMIDA effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 119 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is arranged at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit is confirmed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), the hat icon IX is not arranged, the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are arranged at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end of each horizontal line. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player goes to the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-6), the notification icons of the lords who are not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notification icon I1 of the first lord, the notification icon I2 of the second lord, 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is a notice icon for the red lord, is more likely to be changed to a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is fixed than a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed, The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. For example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2), during the execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then the area shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX has been changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the Amida effect has been promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. For example, FIG. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), before the smoke was extended, it was suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 could be acquired. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 119 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 119 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating an example of another effect of the notice icon increase effect in a stepwise manner. is there. 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch notice display mode (sabohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (1), the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 120 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 120 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 120 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 120 (11) to (12), a display in which the Tono-sama character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the movement animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (15), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is off. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 120 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notification symbol is displayed in the first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. In FIG. 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 121, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a pre-reading symbol variation display hold, but the display mode is For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  121 (a1) to 121 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is provided to notify in advance that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown at 121 (a 3-1), the hat notice icon I 6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 in the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed so that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  When the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, no effects relating to the stock of the notice icon are performed as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  121 (b1) to 121 (b3) show that the prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b1), the game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, so that the third hold icon h13 is displayed as a prefetch notice. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display is finished, and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, a ton-like effect or the like is performed and a notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

  121 (d1) to 121 (d3) show how the notice icon stock and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, as shown in FIG. 121 (d2), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon. The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 (e1) to (e2), the hat notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 122, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 122, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  122 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. Yes. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice and the description of the appearance character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 122 (b1) to (b3), without changing from the stage display area 289 to the notice icon display area 285D, the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to Tono-sama's production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  122 (c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display region 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display region is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  122 (d1) to 122 (d3) show other examples of the notice icon increase effect.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed small on the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed on the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced-size hat displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d3), the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 122 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  122 (f1) to FIG. 122 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  FIG. 122 (f1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  122 (g1) to FIG. 122 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that produces the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 81 (b), and which notice icon is included. It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.

  Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to the advance notice item. It is.

  123 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 123 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have a holding number of zero. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 123 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (e) is reached, the advance notice icon It and the princess advance notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so that the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (h). The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the display is stopped with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), after the suspended symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, the Tonen notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 123 (j), a bad servant notice icon Id is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 123 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is a big jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  Further, when the result of the jackpot determination executed when the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started is out of place, as a result of the hold prefetching in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50 Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of special figure 1 , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 137.

  125 to 137 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 125 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 125 to 135 and 137 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  125 is a diagram showing step-by-step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 126 is a diagram showing step-by-step the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are given. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 125 (d), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. Also, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon with a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (f), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I 61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the bomb icon I61 that bursts changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a sound “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 125 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display related to the notice icon and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (l), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is the Master of the Lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation as shown in FIG. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested is expressed. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I62 of the swinging swordsman moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a) following FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L performs a display notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and the swordsman reach is highly reliable for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 126 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 126 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the main character, Tono-sama, was defeated by the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 126 (i), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. 127 (a) to FIG. 127 (l) are the same as FIG. 125 (a) to FIG. 125 (l), and description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 127 (n), a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is placed (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is displayed. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation as shown in FIG. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (a) following FIG. 127 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 128 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 128 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 128 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the state that the swinging-up chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward and is digested is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. If the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 128 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (m), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to perform an effect display that conveys the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR as will be described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 pops out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR is ruptured. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a6), a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 (b1) to FIG. 129 (b8), another example of a notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b6), a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol table while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 129, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 130 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIG. 130 (a5) to FIG. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (e) to (j), FIG. 130 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 130 (a10). The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation display “Due to digestion of notice icon...” Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman notice icon I62. The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b1) to FIG. 130 (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. Since FIG. 130 (b1) to FIG. 130 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIG. 125 (p) to FIG. 125 (q), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 131 shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Ton-sama is an 8th general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1). In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that “gold is hotter than red”, and a description regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative design, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a2), the balloon TT2 is erased together with the Chibi princess character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 131 (a4), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that “swordsman reach is hot” and explanation about a specific super reach. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the state where the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. In addition, as shown in FIG. 131 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda intrudes”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned on the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 131 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  131 (c1) to 131 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 131 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 132 shows that the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display part TT4, and a stage name display part ST2. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. A hold icon display area is formed at the center of the UI portion shown in FIG. 132 (a1). The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a2), a third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to (k) and described above.

  FIG. 132 (a5) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to a princess notice icon I64 and is moved to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. In the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the state where the predetermined display position (stock position) has not been reached is shown. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed up to now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 132 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display part ST2, and then the tutorial display part. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display is displayed. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this production example, reference is made to the above-described example shown in FIG. 125 as an example of the throwing animation, but it is needless to say that modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 132 (b1) to FIG. 132 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in a variable display.

  Then, after that, the chance up notice icon I63 is consumed, and as shown in FIG. 131 (b2), the chance up notice icon I63 moves upward. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other effects according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  133 (a1) to (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 133 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by Fig.125 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 133 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. In other words, the UI part in the space stage has a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and a hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. Note that the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage shown in FIG. 125 and described above. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a3) shows a state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is not displayed immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 133 (b1) to (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (b1), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows another effect example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  FIG. 134 (a1) to FIG. 134 (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked are changed by the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Ton-sama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (a1), a haten notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a3), the state where the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of Tono-sama reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the Hatena notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a6), what is displayed as “with notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is the enemy of the lord”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (b1) to FIG. 134 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (b1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and FIG. 134 (b3) is the same as FIG. 134 (a6); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 134 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 134 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the Hatena warning icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. Accordingly, at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 134 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (c1) is the same as FIG. 134 (b1), and FIG. 134 (c2) is the same as FIG. 134 (b2); therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c2), as shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new advance notice icon.

  FIG. 134 (d1) to FIG. 134 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (d1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 134 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 that is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for animations performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 135 (a1) to FIG. 135 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 135 (a1) to FIG. 135 (a3) are the same as FIG. 125 (h) to FIG. 125 (j), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 135 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 135 (a4). As shown in FIG. 135 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1-decoration C—decoration” is displayed. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least a part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at a predetermined interval. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap of the notice icon with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 135 (b1) to FIG. 135 (b3), for example, an example of operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to super reach or a big hit is shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 135 (b1) shows a state where super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated with each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  In FIG. 135 (c1) to FIG. 135 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 135 (c1) shows a state where a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 135 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 126 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 135 (c2), the duel scene animation continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c3), as shown in FIG. 135 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in the present embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for holding promotion is an icon for notifying that the display form of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display form with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  136 (a1) to FIG. 136 (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. 136 is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 136 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tono-sama” is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a4) is reached, the entire text “Swordsman is Tonen-Sama's nemesis” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tono-sama” part is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” portion scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and the “I am the enemy” portion is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that when the scrolling of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  136 (b1) to FIG. 13 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 136 (b1) to FIG. 136 (b3) and FIG. 136 (b6) to FIG. (B7) are respectively shown in FIG. 136 (a1) to FIG. (A3) and FIG. 136 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG.

  After the explanation is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 136 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 136 (b4) to 136 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 136 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 136 (b7) is reached, the scrolling display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  136 (c1) to (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 136 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63, which is a notice icon that is scheduled to be digested first, and a swordsman notice icon I62, which is a notice icon that is scheduled to be digested second, are a chance-up notice icon I63. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 136 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. Thus, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the example of production shown in FIG. 137, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI1 has a hold icon display area on the left side where four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame, and four notice icons are displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. A notice icon display area that can be displayed on the right is formed in the upper right, and a tutorial display section TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed at a position above the UI unit UI1 and close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 137 (a), “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed. In addition, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (a), both of which are referred to as a normal display form (in this example, “first display form”). It may be displayed in (). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative design, it does not overlap with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also displayed. Do not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 137 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (c), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (d), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may overlap the decorative symbol that is displayed as a variable symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed display frame is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. This notifies the user that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. When the display frame to be displayed and the notice icon are stocked in the display frame, the display icon overlaps the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with flame. For this reason, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 are also difficult to view together with the notice icon displayed on the UI part UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, make it possible to visually recognize at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5. It may be difficult to see only.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon enlargement animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is a flame effect. A state of appearance from EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, a swordsman notice icon I62 is newly displayed to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is These are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are further enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to view. In addition, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, so that it may be easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon displayed in an enlarged manner may overlap the decorative design. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, in this effect example, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other indications (for example, notice display) (overlapping). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon with a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display form (in this production example, “ It may be referred to as “second display mode”). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed. Are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to view. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in a state where the third notice icon is in an enlarged display mode. In addition, since the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (j), the notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and is easily visible. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-continuous displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is visible. That is, in this effect example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increased by the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icons (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 and I65) displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed. All the swordsman notice icons I62) are visible. That is, it can be said that although the preview icon displayed in the preview icon display frame YF is displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, all of the preview icons are visible.

  Thereafter, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, the notice icon display area shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in addition to the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro" has been changed to "Panda is a master of Tosama". Here, after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, the flame effect EF1 may be erased, or after the flame effect EF1 is erased, the notice icon display frame YF may be erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased simultaneously. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be a timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased or may be a timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Moreover, the display change of the tutorial display part TT5 does not need to be performed. Further, the change icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the increase in the number of holdings is firmly reflected.

  In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the notice icon enlargement animation described above ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. In this case, since there is no notice icon that is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, no notice icon that is difficult to view is generated.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, a flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (i) without passing through the notice icon enlargement animation. For example, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed in FIG. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

  Moreover, in this production example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduced animation after being enlarged and displayed. For example, the notice icon is digested in the state of being enlarged and displayed. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in a normal display mode.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to display the stock notice icon in an enlarged manner. The notice icon to be digested is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the digest icon is enlarged (displayed in the second display form) when digested. You may do it.

  Further, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation that is performed when stocking the notice icon may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in a notice icon stock by a character action (for example, a throwing animation of a bomb icon I61 by Tono-sama character), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the second half part) May be canceled), for example, it may not be canceled in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  Further, the display mode of the enlarged display may be different depending on the number of already-announced notice icons and the number of the previously-stocked notice icons. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the hold is increased while the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. There may be. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increase in hold that is a target of prefetching at the time of starting winning a prize. Even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. Or the like, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. In this way, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be made easier.

  Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

  In the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “extreme heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ream”, etc.), it may be called a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. Yes. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumping into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and the decorative symbol display device 208 or between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to a collision with the effect movable body or the like arranged on the screen.

  FIG. 138 (a-2) shows a state in which effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a family crest character 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the decorative design display device 208, and between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. It is displayed in a mode accommodated in a frame FL1, and a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is displayed in a blinking manner. It is the display mode of the notice. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. Note that the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2) is in a non-display state. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), the Chibi princess character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and along with the spear character GY1 on the right side of the display screen, A balloon part TT3 is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, a line “Where is the bag?” Is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, a line “here is” is displayed. Note that the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbol during the variable display, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where the balloon TT2 and TT3 are not overlapped with the decorative symbol during the variable display. Further, a part of the UI portion (the hold display frame FL1 and the change icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the princess Chibi character CH1 overlap the transparent protective member CL, and are transparent. The visibility may be lower than when the protective member CL does not overlap.

  FIG. 138 (a-3) shows a state in which the family crest character 224 </ b> E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), the family crest member 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlap state with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-4) shows a state in which the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the up and down direction in the expanded display frame FL1. Has been. Note that the balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1, and is difficult to see compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. The balloon portion TT3 is not overlapped because it is displayed above the hold display frame FL1. In addition, the decorative symbols during the variable display are overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where the decorative symbols are not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display up above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-2), and FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-1a), between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative design display device 208 is substantially the same as the size of the decorative design display device 208 in addition to the above-described family crest character 224E. A light guide plate IL is disposed. The light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest member 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b-1), the family crest actor 224 E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 13 (a-3). FIG. 138 (b-2a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-2a), the family crest character 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the crest character 224E is provided between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where it is not interposed between them.

  FIG. 138 (b-3) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 13 (a-4), and FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-3a), the crest character 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player can move the crest character 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. Compared to the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easily visible through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 138 (c-1) and FIG. 138 (c-2) are diagrams for explaining an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c-1), the above-described hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. In the example shown in FIG. 138 (c-2), the second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1 in the portion (extended portion) that extends upward in the hold display frame FL1. Arranged in the layer LY2. Note that the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, and for example, a serif notice, a decorative symbol, a notice display (for example, an arrow flying display) Or any other display can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. It may be.

  The display mode of the UI unit may be configured so as to be different depending on the production mode (hereinafter referred to as “production stage, etc.”) depending on the production stage and the gaming state.

  In addition, at least a part of the production stage or the like may be selectable by the player's operation, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, every fluctuation). Also good.

  In addition, the operation of “the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward” which is a characteristic operation of the present invention is at least a part of an effect stage (for example, an effect stage in a non-electric support state, It may be performed at a part of the stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is displayed during the change, or may be performed at all stage stages or the like.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 154.

  FIG. 139 to FIG. 154 are diagrams showing stepwise variations of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 139 to 154, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 139 to 150, 152, and 154 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, FIGS. 139 to 150 and FIGS. 152 to 154 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a hold change notice effect as a pre-reading notice effect using a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are given. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, the UI unit may be always displayed or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that blinks in white). At this time, a sound output “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice is made by a hold display. Note that audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before audio output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of outputting the sound from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), an explanation display “This change is ...” is made on the balloon portion TT 2, and a suggestion regarding the notice to be performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. The balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, Princess Chibi character CH1 and balloon part TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, balloon part TT2 may be displayed after Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, and balloon part TT2 is displayed. After being done, Princess Chibi character CH1 may be displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon part TT2 is changed to an explanation display "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be the same timing as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped by a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped by a plurality of arrows. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. Also good. Further, it may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased and the timing when the display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. It should be noted that the left symbol stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” is displayed so as to overlap a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. The plurality of arrows and the Princess Chibi character CH1 are deleted. The timing at which the arrows are erased may be after the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, may be before the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, or the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”, the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is combined. After shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” at the timing of the first decorative symbol confirmation stop display. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or may remain displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may erase | eliminate before the fluctuation variation state of a decoration design is started.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the symbol stop display is continued from FIG. 139 (g).

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140B starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Chibi princess. It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”, And a conversation notice is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows again fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of times of symbol variation display. In this example, as in FIG. 139 (c), Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, but other characters may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (d), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the balloon TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper portion of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows a state where the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the rear side. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. This effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 140 (i), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown. As shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area within the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area within the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. Thereby, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (k) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (an LED built in the family crest member 224E, an LED provided at a special drawing start port, etc.) is held on the hold icon before the hold icon to be read ahead changes. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in FIG. An animation display (reduction animation) is performed to reduce the image to the shape shown. The reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1, and in this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. It is also possible to erase the data finally by overlapping with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 is in a default display mode.

  In the example of the above-described effects, the start timing of each effect such as Princess Chibi character CH1, Samurai character GY1, notice display of a plurality of arrows, family crest character 224E, decorative symbol variation display, expansion operation of hold display frame FL1, etc. The end timing can be performed in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1, but an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the image which respond | corresponds the hold icon after a change (corresponding to the hold icon after a change) may be displayed.

  Next, in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an effect example when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

  FIG. 140 (i ′) corresponds to FIG. (I) and has the same effect content as FIG. 140 (i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is in the second hold. As shown in FIG. 140 (k ′), the shuriken SH1 frames out to the lower part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the change in the display mode of the hold icon has failed. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains white and flashing.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 141 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed in response to the stop of the decorative design in which “change” is displayed on the middle symbol. That is, it can be said that the decoration pattern of “change” is a display suggesting the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, a change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a prefetch notice. It is displayed in a manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the fluctuation varies with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 3-change-decoration 1”. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 141 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 141 (b), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest character 224E may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the hold display frame FL1 extends upward and appears above the family crest member 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. Note that the expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display indicating the content of the effect (the decoration pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (f) shows a state in which the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (h) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is more easily visually recognized as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 142, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame at normal time, and when the explanation display is performed, the state of entering the frame from below is shown. 142 (a) to (n) are the same as FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation in and out of the tutorial display unit TT1. Only the portion will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 142 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the character display of “Panda is a master” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the character display of “Panda is the Master of Panda” in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (f) (for example, For 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), when the crest character 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display part TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (f) to FIG. 142 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation is performed to frame out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the extended animation The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is the same as the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this presentation example, it may be an example of the first extended display) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative design. It can be said that it differs in that it does not overlap the notice, there are few overlapping areas, and the frequency of overlapping is low.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 143 shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an explanation display and the frame is out, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 enters the frame again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 performs a notice display. 143 (a) to FIG. 143 (n) are the same as those in FIG. 142 except that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again after the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preview. Since it is the same as (a) to (n) in the figure, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 142 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial starts from the lower right side of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (j). The display is displayed. That is, a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed is performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a preview display can be performed. The character display of “pseudo-ream” may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The completion timing of the frame-in animation in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or the timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be the same timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 143 (j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In this example, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured to be longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed. Alternatively, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be longer when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. In addition, the character color may be different between the explanation display and the notice display. Thus, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a success / failure pattern are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that changes the other display such as a change in hold (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, the stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-run, the display mode of the serif notice Change (for example, a line in blue or blue background changes to a line in red or red text), a step up in a line advance notice (for example, in the state where a line advance notice for character A is displayed, then the line in character B For example, a notice display may be performed)).

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a super reach effect applicable to this embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 144, for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed after the effect display shown in FIG. 140 is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is a pre-read notice display mode that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is deleted. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 shows a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” and an explanation display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 144 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. The family crest member 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display for informing the development to super reach (swordsman reach) is performed.

  And as shown in FIG.144 (c), the light emission means corresponding to light-guide plate IL light-emits, and the pattern imitating the effect image is formed, and it produces that the reliability with respect to the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon. These displays may be difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. Note that the character display erasure timing in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the hold icon erasure timing, or may be a timing after the hold icon erasure timing. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Although the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, the fluctuation icon h0 may also be erased.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (d) to (g), the UI part frames out by the UI part FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the light emission color of the family crest character 224E. In other words, as described above, the display is performed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by extending the hold display frame FL1. In some cases, the display mode after the change of the hold icon can be confirmed even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is accommodated is not displayed.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (h), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, for example, after the duel scene animation is displayed by the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 126 (c) to (h), the first decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 144 (i). In the symbol display device 208L, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” ornamental patterns is derived for both the first ornamental symbol and the second ornamental symbol. Is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144 (j) to (n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen is performed. The hold icon is displayed again after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed. However, the hold icon may be displayed when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes the decoration “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is stopped by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. Further, the family crest character 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased when stopped. Further, the timing at which the family crest character 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration The timing may be after the symbol stop display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the change icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode before the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed and then deleted, or after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be changed after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or it may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the decorative symbol stop display timing.

  In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after being expanded, being expanded, and being reduced may be configured to be displayed. All the hold display frames FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, the cut-in of the ally character and the cut-in of the enemy character). Or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of lines displayed in red, or the like may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. One of a plurality of types of display may be displayed.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 145 (b- 1) to (b-6) show a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed in a state where the notice icon is stocked, and FIGS. FIG. 6C-6 shows a state in which an effect that changes the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially in common with the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 145 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1, and therefore a detailed description will be given. Omitted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-1), the treasure chest notice icon BX is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E and not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E. It is considered difficult to visually compare. Also, in this production example, description will be given using a treasure chest notice icon BX as an example of a notice icon, but the present invention is also applicable, for example, to displaying various notice icons shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 136 (d). Needless to say.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the treasure chest notice icon BX that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged so that visual recognition is easy.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 145 (a-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced, or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. This suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. In other words, a pre-reading notice is performed using the treasure box notice icon BX.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), except that a treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIG. 145 (a-1) to FIG. (For example, an effect or the like performed by stopping the chance symbol) may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 145 (b-3) shows a state where the shuriken SH1 overlaps the treasure box notice icon BX. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX, or may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX. That is, for example, even when the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed as described above in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is more than the treasure box notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side, or may be displayed on the back side.

  FIG. 145 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure box notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. Thereby, it is not known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-5), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 145 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12. However, the crest character 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the hold icon after the change is emitted. There is no change in appearance. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest member 224E.

  FIG. 145 (c-6) following FIG. 145 (c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. The player may not be able to change the display mode of the hold icon, but the advance notice of the treasure box BX may change the appearance of the game and make the production more surprising and may further increase the expectation of the big hit. is there. Note that the change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to a change in size. For example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination may change. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), the speaker 120 performs audio output for notifying that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the audio output is not performed. It may be.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 146 (a-1) to (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, blinking in white). In FIG. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 and the display mode of the hold icon is displayed. FIG. 146 (c-1) to FIG. 146 (c-5) show the effect of changing the display mode of all displayed hold icons. Is shown.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, as shown to FIG. 146 (a-1), the 3rd hold | maintenance icon h13 is displayed by the default display mode.

  In FIG. 146 (a-1) following FIG. 146 (a-1), a state in which the family crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position is shown. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent thereto, not the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 146 (a-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 is shown moving toward the third hold icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13 and the third hold icon h13 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-read notice display mode (blinking in white).

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (a-5) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h <b> 13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the same as the display mode of the pre-read notice. According to this production example, not only the second hold icon h12 but the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h13 changes, so that the production can be surprised and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 may be dramatically improved. . In addition, although this example of production demonstrated the example performed with respect to the 3rd holding | maintenance icon adjacent to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon which is the object of a prefetch notice, you may make it perform with respect to the 1st holding | maintenance icon. When there is a fourth hold, the fourth hold icon h14 may be performed.

  146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-4) show the example in which the head character BC1 is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the thrown object. Except for the point that is changed, it is the same as FIG. 140 (g) to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1, not the ninja character NJ1 but the bancho character BC1 appears. It should be noted that the chief character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character crest character 224E is not partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  FIG. 146 (b-2) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged to facilitate visual recognition. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the chief character BC1 emits a Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown object. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made. It should be noted that the effect display of the Qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side rather than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 146 (b-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. And in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, a mode that Qigong wave KK1 is heading to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. At this time, the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, by allowing characters other than the ninja character NJ1 to be displayed, for example, there may be a case where the reliability of the big hit can be changed by the appearing character.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 146 (c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-3) except for the above, only the differences will be described in detail, and detailed description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c-3) following FIG. 146 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 is overlapped with the second hold icon h12 and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in display mode. This may give a sense of expectation that reliability may increase for all holds. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. The effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the chief character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the longest character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may always be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased and the first hold icons h11 to 3 are compared with the state where the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 is easily displayed again. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this production example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the production can be given unexpectedness and the In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it carry out.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 147 (a-1) to (a-5), the expanded display range of the hold display frame FL1 is shown, and FIGS. 147 (b-1) to ( b-5) shows a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened, and a character relating to the hold change notice effect appears there, and FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4). In the figure, a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed is shown.

  An example of the effect shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (g) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) following FIG. 147 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. Further, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E, and is easier to visually recognize than the state where it is overlapped with the family crest member 224E. In addition, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT3, and the display of the balloon part TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where it does not overlap the balloon part TT3. Also, the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 throws three shurikens SH1. These three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon part TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the family crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes the effect EF2. The display is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Tono. At this time, a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. At this time, the light emission mode of the family crest member 224E is not changed, but may be changed. As described above, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward, and the contents of the effect are also partially different. It should be noted that the production content may be the same even if the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. Further, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. Thereby, there may be a case where a change in the expectation for the big hit can be given by the amount of change of the hold display frame FL1.

  Note that the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3 ′), the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched in addition to the upward expansion. Good. Further, the extended range in the vertical direction of the hold display frame FL1 may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 140 (g), and the extended range in the width direction may be up to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched. In addition, when a third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 147 (b-1), the crest character 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the extended portion. A state in which the family crest member 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. The other contents of the production are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the holding display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background is visually recognized. A state in which various types of display are performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened and the ninja character NJ1 appears. A plurality of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened may be prepared, and the color may be varied depending on the expected degree of change in the display mode of the hold icon. As shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. Note that the timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be after the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully open. It may be a timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. At this time, a closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is lowered like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. Note that the start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the start timing of the display of the effect EF2, or may be the same as the start timing of the display of the effect EF2. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  The production example shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0. This will be described in detail, and description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF3 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variation icon h0 and the variation icon h0 explodes. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variation icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, and the reliability of the change with respect to the big hit may be increased. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 147 (c-3) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In other words, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the variation icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, prior to the notice that the display mode of the change icon changes, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest member 224E or an LED provided at the special drawing start opening) is changed to the change icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 148 shows a state where a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is out of the frame from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon part TT2, suggesting that a UI part FO animation will be performed in which the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 described later is out of frame. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon part TT2 shown in FIG. 148 (a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by frame-out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 148 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the state that the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and special diagram of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are shown. The 4th symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows a state in which the UI part FO animation is performed and the UI part is framed out together with the hold display frame FL1 below the display screen. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to darkening effects or SP reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative design and also overlaps the balloon portion TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the exploding effect EF2 is displayed. Yes.

  Thereafter, FIG. 148 (e) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, but the UI portion is still out of frame, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which an animation (UI part FI animation) in which the UI part enters a frame is performed and the UI part FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this production example, the UI portion including the hold display frame FL1 is out of frame, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. For example, FIG. 148 (a ′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI portion may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148 (a ′) is the same as that in FIG.

  FIG. 148 (a ′) following FIG. 148 (b ′) shows a state in which the UI unit FO animation has been completed. As shown in FIG. 148 (b ′), in this production example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part frames out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being out of frame. The state is maintained.

  In FIG. 148 (c ′), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (c ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the extended portion of the holding display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second holding icon h12. There is an effect of throwing it to the position where it was done. In other words, in this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 149 (a-1) to (a-7), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are shown at the same time. FIGS. 149 (b-1) to (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) following FIG. 149 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the character of Tono-sama is started, and the state of the character of Tono-sama trying to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-3), the crest character 224 </ b> E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 starts to be thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or before the start of throwing the shuriken SH1. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-4), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative symbol and also overlaps the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the spear character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. Note that the timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, may be the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-6), a notice is given that the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green and the display color of the second reserved icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-6), the ruptured bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62, and the swordsman reach is notified. Here, at the timing when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, a sound notifying that may be output from the speaker 120. In addition, the timing at which the swordsman notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green, or before the light emission color of the crest character 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I 62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display section TT 1 while being reduced in size, and then the bomb icon I 61 by the Tono-sama character. The throwing animation ends. In addition, you may alert | report by the audio | voice output that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arrange | positioned in the tutorial display part TT1. In this way, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, it is compared with the state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is not arranged at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1. As a result, at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. In other words, according to this production example, it may be said that the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. In this way, in this production example, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, so that it is easy to attract the player to display the tutorial display part TT1 and the swordsman notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) is the same as FIG. 139 (a) except that the text “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, and thus the detailed description is given in detail. The explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) following FIG. 149 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character becomes a bomb icon. A state of trying to throw I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (b-3), the character of Tono throws the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of doing is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 explodes. Is shown. The display of the ruptured bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and compared to the state in which the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode flashing in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the prefetch notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Moreover, you may make it change the display aspect of a holding | maintenance icon by another change production like this production example. Moreover, the effect which changes the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon mentioned above may be performed in a state where the UI unit is out of frame, for example.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 150 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  The effect example shown in FIG. 150 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 150 (a-2) following FIG. 150 (a-1) shows a state in which the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the samurai character GY1, the balloon part TT3, the tutorial display part TT1, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Compared with the state where TT3, tutorial display part TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize each.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-4), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and a variation icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the change icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an expanded display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the overlap with the character GY1 of the heel has been eliminated, but each part of the right symbol of the balloon TT3 and the first decorative symbol is still displayed as the third decorative symbol. It is overlapped with the device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon h0 accommodated therein, and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In comparison with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has finished moving, with its center aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol all overlap the third decorative symbol display device 208N, together with the middle symbols and the hold display frame FL1. The fluctuation icon h0 becomes invisible in front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped. Compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped, it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed and the hold display frame FL2 is expanded upward, and the extended portion is displayed with the ninja's extension. A state in which the character NJ2 appears is shown. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed is further displayed in an extended manner. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a state in which the ninja character NJ2 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 for which a prefetch notice is being made. It should be noted that the shrine sword SH1 effect display may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-10) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and these light emitting means notify that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. It should be noted that the timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest character 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by animation out of the frame from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-13) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves rightward toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the third decorative symbol display. Part of the device 208N is overlapped, and part of the state is visible along with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one in comparison with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to visually recognize compared to the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-14), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), the overlap is eliminated for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far. As compared with a state where the is not solved, both displays are in a state of easy visual recognition.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-15) shows a state in which the LEDs emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N are turned off. In addition, you may make it light by a default light emission mode (For example, the light emission mode lighted in white), without turning off. On the other hand, the family crest member 224E still emits light in green corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this effect example, one of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol display device. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are connected to the first decorative symbol when performing the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other at the center. The hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And a ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon part TT2, the balloon part TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon All of h0 are overlapped, and the tutorial display portion TT1 and a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 are overlapped.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 151, instead of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided and the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P has an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon. Is shown.

  151 differs from the above-described embodiment in that a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device are provided. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the ornamental symbol display device 208. ing. As shown in FIG. 151 (a), on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and below these are the tutorial display section TT1. Is displayed, a change icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with a princess Chibi character CH1. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”. In addition, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the frog character GY1. A speech display “here is” is displayed on the balloon portion TT3. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 151 (a), a conversation notice is performed. Note that the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the balloon parts TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 151 (b), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and a state where the ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decoration symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decor symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. The state of moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 151 (c) shows a state in which the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P and moves toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Yes. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again more easily than when the effect EF2 is not erased. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 152 (a-1) to (a-6), a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the error display is being performed is shown. FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect display performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is performed. (C-1) to (c-3) in FIG. 15 show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136, and FIG. 152 (d-1) to FIG. FIG. 6D-3 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is performed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136, is shown.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 152 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 140 (d) except that error display is performed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of the others are omitted.

  In FIG. 152 (a-1), when the lower pan is full, a letter “please pull out the ball” is displayed to notify that the lower pan full error has occurred. A state in which the tan error display ER is displayed is shown. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the lower pan full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the blowing portion TT2. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 152 (a-2), since the family crest character 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which a part of the crest member 224E is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, so that it is more than the crest character 224E. A state of appearing upward is shown. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Is difficult to visually recognize compared with a state where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

  FIG. 152 (a-5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja is compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. The character NJ1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 152 (a-6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlap state of the family crest character 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the change icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continued, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the bottom plate full tank error display ER. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 152 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is scrolling to the left. Has been. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “enemy invades” is displayed, and contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display in the display mode of the hold icon over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed.

  FIG. 152 (c-1) shows a state in which the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display form imitating the effect button 136, as an example of the display form of the prefetch notice. In this production example, Princess Chibi character CH1 and Samurai character GY1 are not displayed, and tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the button hold icon is a non-overlapping display even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is moved from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 152 (c-3). It changes into the hold icon of the display mode of Tonosama character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a state where it can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Also good.

  FIG. 152 (d-1) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, a button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. In addition, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is a button effect. It can also be said that the production is not overlapped. At this time, when the error display described above is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. May be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (d-2), the cut-in displayed with the Tono-sama character up and displayed as shown in FIG. 152 (d-3). Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. . At this time, when the error display described above is performed, it is displayed with priority over the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the production examples shown in FIGS. 153 (a-1) to (a-5) do not include the sub display device, and the production display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show how the error display is performed. FIG. 153 (c) shows that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIGS. 153 (d-1) to (d) -2) shows a state in which a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  FIG. 153 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen In the upper right of, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

  Further, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and an eight-yield character 224Fa and a general character character 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”, and fluctuations are performed. In addition, variable display is performed on the second decorative symbol. In the UI portion, a hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon h0 is accommodated is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this effect example, images simulating a heel are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and an effect display that closes the heel is performed as the wipe display. Here, the term “wipe” refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of techniques for wiping, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the fluctuation fluctuation is finished and the display is confirmed. May be performed. Further, for example, it may be performed when a stage change is performed, or may be performed when a transition is made to a super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap the UI part and the first decorative symbol, while they overlap the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display, and the fourth symbol. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that the change icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Here, the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. The timing may be after the timing at which the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  FIG. 153 (a-3) shows that the wipe images WP 1 and WP 2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the state in which the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2 and is finally displayed with the lost symbol. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The display is stopped, and the special figure 1 figure 4 is also stopped and displayed as a lost pattern.

  Thereafter, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the horizontal direction of the display screen, respectively. Is called. As a result, the UI part is visible and the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed so as to be visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed.

  FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show a state in which the wipe display is performed during the error display. The production examples shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 153 (a-3) to (153) except that the lower pan full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the lower pan full error display ER described above overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), the lower pan full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower pan full error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as a lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows a state in which the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153 (c) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanation is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 153 (c), for example, when the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward along with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. An effect such that a ninja character NJ1 appears is performed. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variation icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 153 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward, and the extended portion has the ninja's display. A state in which the character NJ3 is displayed is shown. 153 (d-1) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 140 (D) except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is the same as b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed descriptions of the other will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, and is moved in from the lower part of the display screen to the position surrounding the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 expands upward is performed in the manner described above by the extended animation. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed on the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. You may make it overlap, and you may make it the time when both productions are performed not overlap.

  In addition, when an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed, when the symbol is stopped and the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended hold display frame FL4 is reduced and changed to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is also moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded with the extended animation so that the hold display frame FL4 is directed upward. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such a manner. Further, at the time of symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be once erased, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Also, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state during the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved according to the movement display by the moving animation of the second hold icon h12.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the tutorial display section TT6 as a hold display frame expands, and FIGS. 154 (b-1) to ( In b-5), a state is shown in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated is expanded and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variable icon h0 at the center of the hold display frame. It is displayed in the form accommodated in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is disposed below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. . In the tutorial display section TT6, a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this example effect, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 154 (a-2) shows that the range of the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded by pushing the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area upward by an animation in which the tutorial display section TT6 expands upward. ing. In the expanded tutorial display section TT6, the drinker showdown reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative symbols is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern that is variably displayed, for example, the display of a dialogue such as a conversation notice, the display of the notice, or the effect of changing the display of the hold icon. It can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of “SP development by victory” is performed, and the contents of the effect performed when winning by the drinker confrontation reach effect are notified. In the drinking confrontation reach directing, the main character's Tono-sama is confronted with drinking, and if the intoxication is drunk, the main character's Tono-sama will win and it will be announced that it will develop into SP reach. When the drinker confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 is displayed and the hold icon display area is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 154 (a-3) shows a state in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is continuously performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4), when moving to the SP reach, the effect that the frog is drunk and the protagonist wins is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of losing is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4 ′), the main character's lord is drunk, and the hero's lord is defeated by the trap. Is done. Note that the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) may be configured so that the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) is not performed. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) may be configured so that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) is not performed. In the state shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the hold icon and the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and one of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The second hold icon h12 is a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are set to the default display mode. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays a character display of “With notice icon digestion ...”, suggesting that a notice effect is to be performed. In the tutorial display unit TT7, an explanation display may be performed. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this effect example, the stage name display part and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the family crest member 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157.

  FIG. 155 to FIG. 157 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. In FIGS. 155 to 157, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 155 to 157 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate independently even when they are not closest to each other. Here, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. It is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 155 to 157, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 155 shows that the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrated. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked on the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display on the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 155 (a) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (a), two variable displays in FIG. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 155 (a), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (b), the third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N as shown in FIG. 155 (d). This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to (k) and described above.

  FIG. 155 (e) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character burst, the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a pseudo-notice icon I65 and moves to the stage name display section ST2. In the timing shown in FIG. 155 (e), although it overlaps with the stage name display part ST2, it is shown that it has not reached the predetermined display position (stock position). In this case, since the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not yet displayed in the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least one of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed. The part is in a difficult-to-view state. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon I61 moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display section ST2. When the notice icon is acquired (stocked), as shown in FIG. 155 (e), the explanation display (stage name display) is erased before the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, and the notice is displayed. In the case where the icon is not acquired, as shown in FIG. 155 (e), the explanation display may be configured not to be deleted so that it is possible to grasp in advance whether or not the notice icon is acquired.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (f), when the icon I65 for pseudo-continuous notice is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, it has been displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 until now. The explanation display of “Castle Town Stage” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display started after the prefetch target is held.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (g), the first decorative design display device 208L has a decorative design of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 155 (h), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (h) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 155 (h), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display changes from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed. When the stage is changed, the stage name display unit ST2 does not display the changed stage name, but displays the changed stage name for a few seconds (for example, 5 seconds) in the portion where the background is displayed. You may do it. The stage may be changed at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, after the decoration symbol variation display is started, or before the decoration symbol variation display is started. May be.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (i), a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. Yes. In the balloon part TT2, the above-described conversational production and dialogue production are performed. In this production example, by displaying “GET” together with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, the notice icon related to the pseudo-continuous notice is acquired. Is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon is displayed in the balloon portion TT2. As described above, in this production example, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in a certain explanation display area (stage name display portion ST2), the notice icon may be displayed in another explanation display area (balloon portion TT2). is there. Moreover, although the blowing part TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is not displayed on the balloon section TT2, but may be displayed. Further, the tutorial display unit TT4 may have a larger or smaller display area than the balloon unit TT2. The tutorial display unit TT4 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloon unit TT2. The tutorial display unit TT4 and the balloon unit TT2 may have the same font or different fonts. In addition, the balloon portion TT2 may overlap with the decorative symbol, but the decorative symbol is configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT4 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon unit TT2. Further, the tutorial display part TT4 and the balloon part TT2 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or may be display areas where either one or both are not partitioned by lines. Further, the effect regarding the notice icon may be performed only in the non-electric support state. In this case, for example, in the configuration in which the electric support state is shifted to the non-electric support state and the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 30 times) is transferred to the predetermined effect mode, the predetermined effect is obtained even in the non-electric support state. In the mode, an effect relating to the notice icon may not be performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (j), after the pseudo continuous symbol displayed as "NEXT" in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped, "decorative 2-pseudo continuous symbol- A state in which the fluctuation variation display is performed with the combination of the decoration pattern “decoration 3” and the start of the pseudo-ream is produced is shown. This indicates that the pseudo continuous notice is being performed by digesting the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon portion TT2. Note that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon part TT2 may be directly digested from the state displayed in the balloon part TT2, or may be digested after being stocked once in the stage name display part ST2. You may be made to do. In this way, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon portion TT2 is not stocked until the symbol variation display to be pre-read is performed, but is digested in the symbol variation display performed when the symbol is stocked. You may be made to do. Further, in this production example, when the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is digested, the pseudo-continuous notice is always performed. However, there may be a false notice without the pseudo-continuous notice, for example, When the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is digested, a pseudo-continuous pattern appears and a button image is displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. In addition, for example, a question mark may be attached to the notice icon, and a false notice may be given to the notice icon to which this mark is attached. Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 and the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous notice starts, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed, a false notice is given. If there is, the display may be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. In other words, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 may be used as a notice item for performing an effect asking whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is performed.

  FIG. 155 (k1) to FIG. 155 (k4) show an example of a display mode when a plurality of notice icons of the same type are stocked. When a plurality of notice icons of the same type are stocked, any of the modes described below can be adopted, and a plurality of modes may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (k1), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, the display color may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (k1), When two icons I65 for pseudo-continuous notice are stocked, a state of being displayed in a red display mode is shown. That is, when the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 which is a red display mode is displayed, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous notice is notified twice. Here, the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 may be changed according to the number of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 to be stocked. Further, the change in display mode may be a change in color, a change in shape, a change in size, or a change in display position. In addition, when one of the stocked pseudo-simultaneous notice icons I65 is digested, for example, the pseudo-simultaneous notice icon I65 in the red display mode is shaken as shown in FIG. 125 (q). After moving, the display mode is changed from red to white to digest one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, and then the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 whose display mode has changed is displayed on the stage name display section. You may make it return to the original display position of ST2. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 changes, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 has been digested. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 155 (k2), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, only one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed, and the number of stock icons. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (k2), when two pseudo continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, “× 2” is displayed together with one pseudo continuous notice icon I65. ”Is informed that two icons I65 for pseudo-continuous notice are stocked. When one of the stocked pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 is digested, for example, the stage after the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 swings as shown in FIG. 125 (q). One pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 may be digested by moving one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 upward while leaving the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the name display portion ST2. At this time, the display indicating the number of stocks of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the stage name display section ST2 is erased when it is “× 2”, for example, “× 3”, etc. In the case of a display indicating the number of stocks of three or more, it may be displayed in a form in which the numerical value is reduced by one, such as “× 2”. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 changes, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 has been digested. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 155 (k3), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in stock, they may be displayed side by side as many as the number of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 to be stocked. Well, in the example shown in FIG. 155 (k3), when two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed side by side, so that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed. Are in stock.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (k4), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in stock, they may be displayed using two explanation display areas. In the example shown in (k4), when three pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, and two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed on the balloon section TT2. By displaying the notice icon I65, it is informed that three pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 155 (k1) and (k2), for example, it is applied to a notice icon corresponding to a repetitive effect such as pseudo-continuous notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b). The notice icon corresponding to an effect that is rarely performed a plurality of times, such as the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes corresponding to the effect that promotes the contents of the effect, may not be applied. In addition, the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 155 (k1) and (k2) is applied only to the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, and the notice icon corresponding to the repeated effect other than the pseudo-continuous notice (for example, chance up) The notice icon I63, etc.) may not be applied.

  Further, in this effect example, the stage name display unit ST2 may function as the first display region, the tutorial display unit TT4 may function as the second display region, or the stage name display unit ST2 may display the first display region. The balloon portion TT2 may function as a second display area. Further, the tutorial display section TT4 may function as a first display area, the stage name display section ST2 may function as a second display area, the tutorial display section TT4 functions as a first display area, and a balloon The part TT2 may function as the second display area. Further, the balloon part TT2 may function as a first display area, the stage name display part ST2 may function as a second display area, or the balloon part TT2 may function as a first display area. TT4 may function as the second display area.

  Moreover, in this production example, all of the stage name display unit ST2, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the balloon unit TT2 are configured to be able to display two or more notice icons, but the stage name display unit ST2, the tutorial display unit TT4, A part or all of the balloon part TT2 may be configured to display only one notice icon. For example, only one notice icon may be displayed for the speech balloon TT2 in which the notice is given.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of notice icon digest effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 156 shows an effect performed by digesting the second button notice icon I11.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (a1), a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 156 (a1) has a hold icon display area at the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, but in the stage name display part ST2, the second button notice icon I11 is stocked. The stage name display is erased. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a pseudo-continuous symbol appears and an effect is given as to whether or not a pseudo-continuous notice is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the second button notice icon I11 is made indistinguishable from which notice, and the player may have a sense of expectation. .

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (a2), the second button notice icon I11 stocked in the stage name display section ST2 is being digested. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, display is performed in such a manner that the second button notice icon I11 pops out of the stage name display unit ST2 and hits the pseudo-continuous symbol. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing that the second button notice icon I11 hits the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT and notifies that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and the player The operation of the production button 136 is promoted. Thus, by operating the effect button 136, an expectation is given as to whether or not a pseudo continuous notice is generated. In the stage name display unit ST2, since the notice icons that have been stocked are no longer displayed, the display of the stage name is resumed, and the current stage “shore stage” is displayed. Further, since the operation of the effect button 136 is validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player to that effect. The timing at which the button image 136a is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the chance button lamp 138 emits red light, or the chance button lamp 138 emits red after the button image 136a starts displaying. The button image 136a may be displayed after the chance button lamp 138 emits red light.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 156 (a5). After the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped, the fluctuation variation display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-pseudo-continuous symbol-decoration 3”, and it is shown that the pseudo-rendition starts. . When the effect button 136 is operated, but an effect of failure is performed, the pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled down and a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived.

  Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the second button notice icon I11 is an example of a notice icon related to the operation means.

  In this effect example, a plurality of second button notice icons I11 may be stocked, and each may be targeted for the same notice effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice). However, different notices (for example, pseudo-continuous notice and cut-in notice) may be targeted. In this production example, when a plurality of second button notice icons I11 are stocked, the number of stocked button effects is generated. Therefore, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed. The more you are stocked, the more you can expect.

  FIG. 156 (b1) to FIG. 156 (b7) show another mode in which the button notice icon is stocked and another mode in which the stocked button notice icon is digested.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b1), a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 156 (b1) has a hold icon display area at the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (b1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “coast stage” which is the current stage name is displayed. Has been. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is also performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b1), a part icon p1 displaying “+1” indicating the number of parts necessary for stocking the button notice icon appears. As will be described in detail later, when the part icon p1 appears, the number of parts of the button meter 136m indicated by the part icon p1 is accumulated, and when the tank is full, one button notice icon is stocked.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A button meter 136m simulating the shape of the effect button 136 is displayed at the bottom of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button meter 136m is configured by four parts, and is configured such that the parts are accumulated when the above-described part icon p1 appears. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), no parts have been stored yet. Above the button meter 136m, the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be digested (that is, the number of stocks) is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), “0 more times” is displayed. Notifies that there is no digestible button notice icon. The button meter 136m may be always displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may not be displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (b2), the part icon p1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has one part of the button meter 136m. The state of accumulation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b3), a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with a princess Chibi character CH1. In the balloon part TT2, “GET” is displayed together with the part icon p1 displaying “+1”, and it is informed that one part of the button meter 136m is accumulated. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the display of the part icon p1 is also performed in the balloon part TT2. Note that a part icon p1 may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 or the stage display unit ST2 to notify that the parts of the button meter 136m are accumulated. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 156 (b3) shows a state where three parts of the button meter 136m are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (b4), the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a button meter. It shows how the 136m parts are full.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (b5), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the remaining digestible number of button notice icons becomes “one more time”, that is, one button notice icon is stocked. The button meter 136m is changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (b6), the stocked button notice icon is digested, and the second button notice icon I11 appears, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M changes to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is performed in such a manner that it moves over and hits the pseudo-continuous pattern. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing that the second button notice icon I11 hits the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted. Thus, by operating the effect button 136, an expectation is given as to whether or not a pseudo continuous notice is generated. It should be noted that the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be digested is displayed “0 more times”, that is, it is informed that the number of button notice icon stocks has become zero. Further, since the operation of the effect button 136 is validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player to that effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the button notice icon is stocked differently from the other notice icons.

  According to this production example, in the situation where, for example, when one more part of the button meter 136m is accumulated and the button production is generated due to the full tank, the appearance of the part icon p1 displaying “+1” is expected. There are cases where the production can be entertained. In addition, for example, in a situation where two or more parts need to be stored before the button meter 136m is full, a part icon p1 that stores a plurality of parts such as “+2” can be displayed, It may be possible to avoid giving up.

  FIG. 156 (c1) to FIG. 156 (c3) show another mode in which button notice icons are stocked. In this production example, when the number of remaining digestible button notification icons is not displayed and the parts of the button meter 136m are full, the second button hold icon I11 appears and appears on the stage name display section ST2. The stock is shown. Note that FIGS. 156 (c1) to (c2) are the same as FIGS. 156 (b3) to (b4) except that the remaining noticeable number of button notice icons is not displayed. The description is omitted.

  When the parts of the button meter 136m are full, as shown in FIG. 156 (c3), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second button notice icon I11 appears, and the second button notice icon I11 that has appeared. Moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward the stage name display unit ST2, and the second button notice icon I11 is at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2. When displayed, the stage name display of “coast stage” that has been displayed so far is erased in the stage name display section ST2, and the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. A state in which it is informed that it is the stock area of the notice icon is shown. In addition, the button meter 136m is changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored. The timing at which the button meter 136m changes to a display mode in which no parts are stored may be the same as the timing at which the second button notice icon I11 is stocked in the stage name display section ST2. After the meter 136m changes to a display mode in which no parts are stored, the second button notice icon I11 may be stocked in the stage name display part ST2, or the second button notice icon I11 may be displayed. After being stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the button meter 136m may be changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 157 (a1) to (a5) show another mode in which button notice icons are stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 157 (a1) has a reserved icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 157 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “coast stage” indicating the current stage is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a combined animation is performed, and a pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen. The semi-transparent button notice icon I11f is used to notify that the second button notice icon I11 is materialized and the second button notice icon I11 is stocked by combining. The pair of translucent button notice icons I11f move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button notice icons I11f are combined has been described. However, for example, an effect in which the four semitransparent button notice icons I11f are combined may be performed. The second button notice icon I11 is materialized when the effect of combining the four translucent button notice icons I11f is performed, compared to the case where the effect of combining the semi-transparent button notice icons I11f is performed. The probability of being stocked may be increased.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 157 (a2) to (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the united animation is continuously performed, and the pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are displayed while gradually approaching each other. Shows moving to the center of the screen. The pair of translucent button notice icons I11f overlaps the first decorative symbol, but may overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are combined and the second button notice icon I11 is materialized. Yes. Note that, in the merge animation, when the merge of the semi-transparent button notice icon I11f fails, the semi-transparent button notice icon I11f is framed out toward the lower part of the display screen without being merged. The united animation is performed when the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, but may be applied when stocking another notice icon. Further, the notice icon for performing the combined animation may be only one type, two or more types, or all types. In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in a semi-transparent manner in the coalesced animation, it is displayed in an unspecified form (for example, a question mark display etc.), and when the merge is successful, It may be possible to specify whether the icon is a notice icon.

  After the second button notice icon I11 is materialized as described above, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (a5), the second button notice icon I11 is reduced to display the stage name. Stocked in part ST2. At this time, the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is erased and “STOCK” is displayed, notifying that the stage name display unit ST2 is an area for displaying the notice icon. ing.

  FIGS. 157 (b1) to (b3) show a state in which a mission for stocking a notice icon on a predetermined explanation display unit is being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 157 (b1) has a hold icon display area formed at the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (b1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 157 (b1), “Save the notice icon” is displayed (mission display), and the mission icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 until the tank is full. It has been reported that this has occurred. When the mission is achieved, for example, in addition to performing an effect corresponding to the notice icon, a special benefit such as a premier notice is given. The mission may be displayed outside the tutorial display unit TT4. For example, the mission may be displayed on another explanation display unit such as a balloon appearing in a conversation notice or a stage name display unit ST2, or an explanation display. It may be displayed in a display area other than the part. On the other hand, in the stage name display portion ST2, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, and the display of the stage name is erased. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (b2), a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the tutorial display portion TT4 is shown. In addition, about the aspect until the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the tutorial display part TT4, any aspect mentioned above can be used.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (b3), a state in which a chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked not in the tutorial display portion TT4 but in the stage name display portion ST2 is shown. Originally, there is a higher possibility that special benefits will be given to those stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, but this possibility is reduced by stocking in the stage name display section ST2. In some cases, the player may be disappointed and more motivated for the stock of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT4. When the above-mentioned mission occurs, a notice icon may be always stocked in the tutorial display section TT4.

  In this way, it can be said that in this effect example, the mini-game using the notice icon is shown.

  FIG. 157 (c) and FIGS. (C1) to (c5) show an example of a mode when the notice icon is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode, but the change icon h0 is an icon indicating the symbol change display that was the object of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the prefetch notice. The display mode (for example, the display mode in blue circles) is displayed. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged below the variation icon h0, and various information regarding the game and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 157 (c), “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...” is displayed, and an explanation suggesting the relationship between the Tono-sama character and the notice is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 157 (c), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  In this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1. And when the notice icon stocked in the tutorial display part TT1 is digested, it is performed in the procedure shown by FIG. 157 (c1)-the figure (c5). For ease of explanation, only the change icon h0 and the tutorial display section TT1 are shown in FIGS. 157 (c1) to (c5), and the others are not shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157 (c1), when a notice icon is stocked in a state where characters are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the stock icon is stored as shown in FIG. 157 (c2). The notice icon (here, the swordsman notice icon I62) is arranged at the center of the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon is digested, as shown in FIG. 157 (c3), the notice icon starts to swing, and the expectation as to whether or not the notice icon is digested is given. At this time, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the notice icon.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (c4), the state that the notice icon that has been oscillating moves upward is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c4), the notice icon overlaps with the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to view than when the notice icon does not overlap with the fluctuation icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (c5), the notice icon stops above the change icon h0, a predetermined effect display is performed, and the notice icon is informed.

  Note that when the notice icon moves to a position that does not overlap the tutorial display portion TT1, the character display on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be resumed.

In the above description,
“First operation means [for example, transparent portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
A second operating means [for example, a chance button 136];
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the final shown in FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. (Q), and FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. Judge production etc.]
The first production is configured to start according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 26 (m) to FIG.
When the first operating means does not vibrate when the second operating means vibrates [For example, the first operating means may vibrate while the second operating means vibrates. If there is no, the first operating means such as FIG. 24 (m) -FIG. (P), FIG. 25 (m) -FIG. (R1), FIG. 26 (m) -FIG. If it does not vibrate],
The first effect is not a notice effect relating to the second operation means [for example, an operation notice effect including a notice for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 or a notice regarding the operation result of the chance button 136].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Whether it is the first operation means or the second operation means, a button, such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel may be used. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers, and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only those that are operated by direct contact, but also those that can be operated by holding the hand even if direct contact is not possible.

  The first operation means includes a chance button (for example, a chance button 136), another chance button (for example, a button B (second chance button 137)), a cross key (for example, a cross key 181a), a transparent button. It may be any one type selected from button-like parts such as the unit 191, lever, touch sensor, and touch panel, only one type is applied, and the others are not Application is also possible. For example, a chance button (for example, a chance button 136) may be applied to the first operation means, and the remaining chance buttons, cross keys, etc. may not be applied.

  Furthermore, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only a direct contact operation but also an operation means that can be operated by holding a hand even if the direct contact is not possible (for example, a non-contact type).

  Moreover, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the modes may differ depending on the operation means such as the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, and pitch. For example, the first operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operation means may be capable of executing vibration according to the second aspect.

  The notice effect may be one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects. The notice here may be a jackpot notice, a advance notice to Super Reach, a pseudo-continuous start notice, or a pseudo-continuous notice. . Alternatively, one or a plurality of the notice effects of the plurality of kinds of the notice effects may be applied, and the others may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of the plurality of types of notice effects may be applied, and the others may be all unapplicable.

  Further, the execution period of the notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of the display of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or confirmation of the decorative symbol It may be up to display. Alternatively, it may be until the movable means starts moving from the first position to the second position and then returns to the first position again, or until it starts moving to the first position. Also good. Also, only one of the multiple types of execution periods exemplified here may be used, or multiple types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods may be applied. May be. More specifically, when the first effect is the final judge effect, the decorative symbol temporarily stops (fluctuates and fluctuates) in combination with the big hit symbol pattern from the start of the notification or the like that is performed for the first time after the button operation. The execution period of the first effect may be until the end of the button operation or until the end of the button operation (particularly the result of success) is displayed.

  Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at the second position (for example, the final arrival position), for example, when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. Alternatively, it may vibrate in a state where an effect display or the like executed in accordance with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the movable means is located at the second position and the effect is displayed. You may vibrate in the state where the image is displayed. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Furthermore, “the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operation means” means that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operation means. Then, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means and other conditions (operations of other operation means, etc.) being satisfied. In addition, the first effect may be started only in response to an operation of the first operation means, and if other conditions are satisfied even if the first operation means is not operated, The first effect may be started. For example, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first effect may be started even if the first operation means is not operated, and conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation means, the fixed time Even if it passes, the aspect in which said 1st production may not be started may be sufficient.

  The first effect may be configured to be able to start in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be always started, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or only by the operation of the first operation means. It may be started.

  In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the first state, the first effect may be executed. Here, the first state may be a state in which notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means is performed, or a state in which such notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed. The establishment of the first condition here includes that the first operating means has been operated.

  Further, “in the first effect” may or may not extend over the first effect.

  In addition, “in the first effect, the second operation means vibrates” includes not only starting to vibrate arbitrarily but also starting to vibrate when a condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one that does not vibrate unless it is operated continuously, may be one that vibrates continuously without being pressed, and is not continuous and intermittent. May vibrate. In addition, only one of the multiple types of examples listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

  Further, even after the first performance is finished, the second operation means may be capable of vibrating, and in this case, the second operation means may always vibrate or vibrate. There may be cases where the vibration is not performed, the vibration may be performed other than the vibration, or only the vibration may be performed.

  Furthermore, it may continue to vibrate from the first effect, or may be temporarily stopped and restarted. Alternatively, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is finished.

  Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. Alternatively, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect executed at intervals among the multiple effects, and the second operation means may be configured to perform the first operation in all of the multiple effects. The two operating means may be configured to vibrate.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect. Furthermore, “the second operation means is configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect” means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. It may be configured to be performed regardless of whether or not to do so.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m), etc.]
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second production may be started in response to an operation of the second operation means [for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l)],
Before the second presentation is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. j)-(k), FIG. 18 (j)-(k), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the display of the image prompting the operation is started, or configured to start vibration after the start of the operation reception state. Also good.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. In addition, it may be configured to vibrate after the end of the second effect.

  An effect (second effect) that is started in response to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (plural) effects among a plurality of effects. There may be a case where the second operation means may vibrate before the second presentation is started.

  Furthermore, everything performed by the operation of the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, all of liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking, and the like. However, the second effect may target only the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means performed in the first effect continues until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the second operation means is operated, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may end, or when the second operation means is operated, it may end, or when the first effect ends, it may end together, or the first effect ends. However, it may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (it may end immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol or at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means that is performed before the start of the second effect may end when the second operation means is operated, or the second effect starts. May be terminated at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration end condition is determined when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed before the second effect is started. Will be different.

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means performed before the start of the second effect is continued until a predetermined vibration time elapses even when the first operation means is operated. However, it may end when the vibration time elapses, or may continue until the first effect ends, and may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol) Or it may end simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol). In these cases, the vibration end condition is the same when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed before the second effect is started.

Also,
“Equipped with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of displaying an image,
The first effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means [for example, an effect display in the final judge effect shown in FIGS.
The second effect is a display of an image on the display means [for example, an image different from the image in the first effect, such as a display of the character GC of the princess at the back of the fence in the judge effect shown in FIGS. Display]
If the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where no new effect is started even if the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for music output from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  Further, the second display means may always display an image.

  Further, the second operating means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Furthermore, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.

Also,
The second effect is an effect that starts after the decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 16 (b)],
And
Before the second presentation is started, after the decorative display variation display [for example, the decorative design variation display started in FIG. 16B] is started. And
In the second performance, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 18 (m)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The second operating means may vibrate before the start of the second effect, and may continuously vibrate in the second effect, or may be resumed after being temporarily interrupted. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, the strength of vibration, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operation means before the start of the second effect may be executed during a reception state period of the second operation means.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes a first operation means and a second operation means, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one effect among the plurality of effects is The first effect is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, and the second effect is a notice effect. Yes, the first production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means, and the second operation device is configured to vibrate in the first production. In the second production, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.

Also,
“When the second operating means vibrates rather than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. FIG. (L) etc.] is configured to make it easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state or a subsequent probability change state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “favorable state for the player” means a big hit (small hit) or a big hit gaming state, a probability change state between probability change and short time, 15R big hit and 4R big hit. Of these, a gaming state of 15R big hit (big hit with a larger number of rounds) or a state in which 100 times of 100 times and 50 times of electric support are given.

  Further, “so that it is easy to shift” may be that the game is surely shifted to the big hit gaming state if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit decision, and the second operation means may necessarily vibrate in the first effect.

In addition, it includes first display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,
When the second operation means vibrates [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. 16] than when the second operation means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. (L) etc.] may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be associated with a jackpot, and further may be configured to be more likely to be associated with a jackpot with probability variation.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), etc.]
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, a mode in which all are different, or a mode in which only a part is different. May be. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be an aspect in which the second movable means is also moved. The movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  The second operating means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes vibration when the third effect ends. It may be a thing.

Also,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that during the period in which any one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

  Furthermore, it may be configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect is started in accordance with the operation of the first operation means.

Also,
`` It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification urging the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 23 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 24 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 25 (k)]. ~ Transmission part display 191X etc. of the operation promotion notification shown in (l2), FIG. 26 (k) and (l) of FIG.
The first effect is the first period [for example, the period from FIG. 23 (k) to (l), the period from FIG. 24 (k) to (l), FIG. 25 (k) to FIG. In the period of (l2), the period of FIG. 26 (m) to the period of (l), etc.], the production starts when the first operating means is operated,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.

Also,
“The second operating means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being executed [for example, the whole period in the examples of FIGS. 24 to 25 and 26, and the example of FIG. 23. It is means configured to vibrate in part of the period etc. because it does not vibrate in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first operation means is a means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate,
The second operation means is a means [for example, a chance button 136] configured to be capable of vibrating.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that “vibration” means direct vibration when the operation means itself vibrates, and does not include indirect vibration in the case of indirect vibration due to vibration of other members. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

  Even in a state where the first effect is not executed [for example, a state during execution of the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 34D to 34E, not the final judge effect, etc.] The operating means may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to vibrate without fail.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with second operation means [for example, button A (chance button 136), etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect [e.g., a cut-in notice of “hot heat” shown in FIG. 39 (h) to FIG. 39 (i) and FIG. 40 (i), respectively]]. And
The fourth effect is configured to start according to the operation of the second operation means,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,
The second notification is a notification [for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification] that prompts the operation of the second operation means,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be performed in a decorative symbol change display [for example, 3 ↓ 3 displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, respectively]. ,
The fourth effect is an effect that starts when the second operation means is operated in the second period [for example, FIG. 39 (g), FIG. 40 (h), etc.]
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,
The second period is a period that may start at the first time in the variable display [for example, the time of FIG. 39 (g), etc.]
The second period is a period that may start at a second time in the variable display [for example, the time of FIG. 40 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may be always executed or may not be executed, other than a plurality of types of effects may be executed, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. .

  In addition, the fourth effect may be an effect that is always executed in the decorative display variation display.

Also,
[Equipped with third operation means [for example, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
The second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the third operation means [for example, after the button B operation, the cut-in notice by the Tono-sama character display starts, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect [for example, cut-in notice by Tono-sama character display starting from FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.]
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,
The third notification is a notification [for example, an operation promotion notification button B display 137X] that prompts the operation of the third operation means,
The fifth effect is configured to start in response to an operation of the third operating means,
The fifth effect is the third operation means in the third period [for example, the period of FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e), the period of FIG. 40 (d) to FIG. 40 (f), etc.]. Is operated [for example, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f), etc.],
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the third period is a period in which the third notification is performed.

Also,
The aspect of the fifth effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the fourth effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The fifth effect is an effect that may be performed in a variation display of decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The fifth effect is an effect that does not start unless the third operation means is operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The fifth effect is an effect that starts even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started when the third period elapses, or may be an effect started after the third period elapses.

Also,
The fourth effect is an effect that does not start unless the second operation means is operated in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  By doing so, the fifth effect is clearly different from the case where the third operation unit is not operated in the third period even when the third operation unit is not operated. It becomes possible to give a width to the entangled production.

Also,
“The first time is a time after elapse of a first time [for example, four frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 39 (b)],
The second time is a time after elapse of a second time [for example, five frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 40 (b)],
The second time is a time different from the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42B, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42B, and FIG. ), Etc.]
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the change icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′). , Mini-icon mA shown in FIG.
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display may be displayed after the display of the first display starts,
The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon is changed [for example, attention should be given to each of FIGS. 42 (b), 42 (B), and 43 (B). Item display AT, etc.]
The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon is changed [for example, in each of FIG. 42 (c), FIG. 42 (C), FIG. 42 (E ′), and FIG. 43 (C). The actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, may be means for displaying the icons, or may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.

  Moreover, after the display of the first display starts, the second display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“The second icon [for example, the fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is a different type of icon from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"With symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The first icon is a hold icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG.
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.
The second icon is a fluctuation icon [for example, a fluctuation icon c shown in FIG.
The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display when the hold represented by the suspension icon is digested and the symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed.

Also,
“It is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG.
The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′)],
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold.
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are icons having different times when the hold is made.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a pre-reading preview mini icon mC that suggests that it will be a big hit]
The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [e.g., a mini icon mA for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started once],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first display is a display that is displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second display is a display that is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second display is a display displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Second operation means [for example, chance button 136 etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209 ′, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is configured to display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [eg, timer notice display T, etc.]
The third display is a display corresponding to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e), 25:00 shown in FIG. ) And the cut-in notice image C1 displayed in black letters and the chance and the special-form cut-in notice image C displayed in gray letters shown in FIG. Display
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is equal to or less than the first remaining time or the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. No.] display mode [e.g., 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e) and non-display shown in FIG. 45 (a) or the chance and cut-in notice shown in black letters shown in FIG. 50 (B) The display may be started with the image C1 and the special mode cut-in preview image C displayed in gray characters and the chance shown in FIG.

  Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, may not display, may display other than a plurality of types of display, or may display a plurality of types of display. May be displayed.

Also,
'One of the plural types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, a normal display 136N of an operation promotion notification, etc.]
When the second operation means is operated, the display of the third display is started [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period], and when the display is not started [for example, the operation valid period In the case of an operation before or after the operation valid period elapses, etc.]
In the second case, the fourth display is a display that is not displayed during the period from when the second operation means is operated until the display of the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.

Also,
‘The first notice display is a timer notice display,
The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like] indicating a first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like]
After the first remaining time becomes zero, a notice effect [e.g., a normal notice effect in which the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess's face, or FIG. 46 (g) Pre-read notice effect etc. in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.
The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the notice effect is started.

Also,
“The notice effect is a notice related to the symbol variation display performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. Is a regular notice that changes to the aspect, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  More specifically, as the notice effect, a so-called pseudo-ream effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect [for example, a super reach effect, etc.], or an improvement in the expectation of a big hit in the reach effect is suggested. Such as a change in the character color of a title or dialogue, a cut-in effect [for example, a cut-in effect just before the symbol stops], or the like.

Also,
'One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing the number of holds depending on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
The advance notice effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode [for example, the pre-read that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Notice production etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display means may always display a display indicating the number of reservations, may not display it, may display other than the number of reservations, or displays only the number of reservations. You may do.

Also,
“When the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the held icons representing the number of held icons before increasing is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. [For example, the change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the hold icons are displayed. The display mode of a plurality of hold icons may be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
“When the number of holdings increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the holding icons representing the number of holdings after the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice May change to,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or a plurality of hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed. May be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, time display T1 shown in FIG. 48, etc.]
The sixth display includes a display including a display representing a second remaining time different from a display representing the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 48B] [for example, In the timing of FIG. 48 (b), it is 5:00 seconds]
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third display may be a display that is always displayed together with the sixth display.

Also,
[Counting means [for example, counter timer 412 etc.]
The display representing the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the symbol display means [for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing the symbol variation display, the first control means [eg, the main control unit 300, etc.], and the second Control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400], the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is control means that can control the symbol display means [for example, control means that executes a special symbol state update process], and the second control means is control of the display means [for example, , Production control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be a means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means constituted by a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402, the VDP 434, the VRAM 436, etc.].

  The symbol display means may be means for displaying the symbol variation display without fail, may be a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or may execute other than symbol variation display. Alternatively, only symbol variation display may be executed. The second control unit may be a unit that always executes control according to a command from the first control unit, or may be a unit that may execute the control. Other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.

Also,
“The third display indicates that the operation timing of the second operation means matches the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. A display that starts to be displayed in a display mode [for example, a special mode displayed in gray letters and chances shown in FIG.
The third display is displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the chance and black characters shown in FIG. 50 (B) when the operation timing of the second operation means does not coincide with the first timing. The display starts with the cut-in preview image C1 etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Third operation means [for example, button B (operation button 137 ′) shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that may be displayed even when the third operation means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. Display of the image C3 of the cut-in notice of].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“It is provided with a third display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means [for example, timer notice display means 209 ′ etc.] is a separate means from the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third display means may or may not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may execute other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Only the variation display of the decorative design may be executed.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine equipped with effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative display variation display [for example, immediately before FIG. 52 (b) to FIG. 52 (h)],
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the first period of the variation display [for example, the period from the start of symbol variation until the hold icon moving animation ends]. Yes,
When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period in the variable display, the second period in the variable display [e.g., until just before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)]. In the period, the period from FIG. 55 (a) to the period immediately before FIG. 55 (d)], the first effect display is configured not to start displaying,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of held icons respectively change” may be an effect display in which the display modes of all of the plurality of held icons change all at once, or an effect display that changes one by one. It may be an effect display that changes by a plurality. It should be noted that only one of the multiple types of examples of the effect display listed here may be applied, multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the number of suspensions increases during the first period, the first effect display may be started during the first period. In addition, when the hold increases during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started during the first period in the variable display started following the stop display of the decorative symbol. There is a case.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for displaying a plurality of hold icons without fail, a means that may display the hold icons, or a means for displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

Also,
“The first period is a period [for example, the period of the first half including FIG. 52 (b)] whose start is the time when the variable display starts.
The second period is a period [for example, a period of the second half until immediately before FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the display of the first effect is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect is not started during the display of the variable display. In other words, the display of the first effect is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.

Also,
'The end of the first period is the start of the second period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative design,
The first effect display is an effect display that may occur when the display is started during the display of the stop display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or the case shown in FIG. 55 (f), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the suspension increases during the display of the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display. Further, even when the hold increases during the display of the variable display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol without fail, or may be a means for displaying the display, or displays other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first effect display is displayed when the number of hold increases during the display of the variable display, and when the display starts after the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or FIG. f), etc.] is a presentation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect display is the first period in the variation display started after the variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first variation display ”) in which the number of holdings is increased [for example, FIG. In the first half of the period including (h), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that always starts to be displayed in the first period in the variable display that is started next to the first variable display.

Also,
“The number of the plurality of hold icons whose display modes change according to the first effect display is the number before the increase of the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. Example]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [for example, an animation shown in FIG. 52 (k), etc.]
The moving animation is an animation in which display is completed before the second period starts.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of the characters “heat” of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (b)],
Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is configured to start displaying in the first period,
When at least one hold icon of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the display of the first effect display is not started even in the first period. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of a pre-reading notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode. Is different from the jackpot reliability (expected degree), the second display mode may be a display mode having a higher jackpot reliability (expected degree) than the first display mode, Conversely, a low display mode may be used.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display form.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display form, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display form.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition,
"A game machine equipped with effect display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may start to be displayed in a first period [for example, a period from the start of symbol variation until the moving animation of the hold icon ends]
In the case where the display of the first effect is not started in the first period, the second period [for example, the period from FIG. 53 (a) to immediately before FIG. 53 (c), FIG. In the period until immediately before (d) in the figure], the first effect display is configured not to start displaying,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

further,
"A game machine with stage display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative pattern,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of decorative symbols,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may not start during execution of the variable display.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display may be an effect display that is not necessarily displayed during execution of the variable display.

further,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display when the suspension increase is performed during the stop display.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the variation display when the suspension display is increased during the variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is surely started during execution of the stop display when the suspension display is increased during the stop display. Further, the first effect display is an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the change display when the hold display is increased during the change display. Also good.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. The image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area has been digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 82 (4). The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. Displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and FIG. 97 (49)],
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is always out of place after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is displayed [for example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, 4 or 8],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 97 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)]. It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design variation display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means may include a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 83 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 82 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol change display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 82 (1) As shown in FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), a digest display of the hat notice icon I6 and an increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are performed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 for the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [e.g., a thousand box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 85 (47) or FIG. 96 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 92 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 97 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to (57). Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 82 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may start [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 82 (9) to 83]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started displaying at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14). ],
Symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)” The first notice icon that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 82 ( 9) to 83 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching as shown in FIG. 83 (23). Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 83 (25), the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching is such that the hat notice icon I6 that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (23). A hat stand icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [e.g., hat notice icon I6] is digested, the first notice display [e.g., pseudo shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31) is used as the notice display. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.,
When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 81 (b), etc.]
A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 82 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of a decorative symbol, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 82 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 104 (1), etc.] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 104 to FIG. 105, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32), When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIG. 85 (46) to FIG. May start, etc.]
The first combination of the displayed warning icons [for example, the combination of the “home” warning icon I21 and the “mon” ”warning icon I22 shown in FIG. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 105 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

“The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 104 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 105 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested], etc. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 83] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. 84 (28 ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]
Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112],
A game machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 109 (10) to 110 (13) digests, or FIGS. ) Shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to FIG. 112 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,
The second display means displays the notification icon [for example, the notification icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 109 (2) to FIG. The display of the notification icon I6 of the hat or the display of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 112 (c6)]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 may function as a prefetch notice display],
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 112 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 112 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112]. There is a case in which a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to (5), a notice that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A is displayed. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

Further, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

Further, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81, etc.]
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 110 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the long character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 109. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
First moving means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. 115, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 115 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81, the notice icon I21 of “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 115 (12)] to the second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 115 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest dropping effect shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)],
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may necessarily execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 115 (the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.) Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 117 (1), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display is terminated. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 117 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIGS. During the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9 and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 117 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in 119 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, the “design variation display that is a prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth design variation display [for example, the design variation display shown in FIGS. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 82). As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked after the symbol variation display as a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display as a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 117. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (hat notice icon I6 etc.) shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.]” ”) Is put on hold, and the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 120 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,
A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the big hit that is the target of the prefetching. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the prefetch target is displayed after the display of the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended. Until the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the two hat notice icon I6, the thousand car box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of symbol variation display is on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, the on-hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third suspension that is a prefetch target shown in FIG. 120 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

Further, as the second pre-reading notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second pre-reading display form [for example, the pre-reading notice display form (savohani display form) shown in FIG. 120 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is held. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display form, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetch notice display [for example, an effect display in the prefetch mode shown in FIGS. 121 (b2) to (b3), etc.],
The third pre-reading notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. 121 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 120 (2) ”). ")" Is suspended, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display etc. shown in Figs. 120 (4) to (13)]". ) May start,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to 86 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended is started after the symbol variation display is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66), which is lost, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66), For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The advance notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, No explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a7), displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 129, etc.]
The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132],
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are displayed (stock), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132. A display area different from a display area [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display that is displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a9), displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the second display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display of “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG.
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 129, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a9), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine comprising display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137]
The notice icon is configured to be displayed in multiple types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a display mode of the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l), etc.]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, display of the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i). Aspect etc.],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display form than in the first display form [for example, from the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l). In addition, the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) is larger in size, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked. [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is enlarged, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in other than a plurality of types of display modes. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the size of the notice icon may necessarily be larger in the second display form than the first display form, and the notice icon may be larger in the second display form than in the first display form. There may be no cases.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ) And displayed in the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 137 (l) after being enlarged as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. Thus, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. The display mode may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. In addition, it may be displayed in the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. It may be displayed in the display mode.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a variation of a decorative symbol. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display form [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the normal display form displayed in the notice icon display area The icon I65 of the pseudo-continuous notice and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman are not overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may not be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may be not overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in any display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. .

In addition, “the decorative symbol variation display is a display that does not overlap the notification icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. It is not overlapped with the pseudo-prediction icon I65 or the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area]
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may be overlapped with the notification icon in the second display mode [For example, as shown in FIG. [It is overlapped with the pseudo-prediction icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 in the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not be overlapped only with the notice icon of the first display form, or may be non-overlapped other than the notice icon of the first display form. . In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display form. There may be something. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when digested,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when digested, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than when digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when digested.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137 (a)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area. The icon I65 of the quasi-continuous notice and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman are displayed in a normal display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, and other than the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. The display mode may be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when displayed in the hold display area, or the first display mode may be displayed in a case other than when displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed.

Further, “when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 137 (i) As shown in FIG. 4, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when a notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, the second display mode is a display mode in which the preview icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the swordsman's preview icon I62 of the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137 (i) The enlarged display of the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 137 (l)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Also good. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon in the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or may be a display form in which the notice icon in the first display mode is not enlarged.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] Yes,
The display means can display a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (25). In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 84 (28) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of kinds of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only a notice display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon is digested. There may be a case where a notice display other than the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the kind of notice notice corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the kind of the notice icon that is digested. There may be cases where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Also, only when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or in cases other than when the notice icon is digested A type of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed.

“The display means is means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as“ hold number ”) [for example, FIG. In the hold icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65) shown in FIG. 1 is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display being suspended]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Game table provided with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display Because
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a), etc.]
Among the icon display frames, an icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “icon”) can be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter referred to as “in-frame region”) [for example, As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the change icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a), etc.]
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc.]
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i) is shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.]
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a first decorative symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b) or a second decorative symbol display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Design variation display etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.] so,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the icon display frame that is displayed with priority is expanded, and the player is aware that the effect is being performed by performing an effect such as a notice or a pre-read notice in the expanded part. There is a case that can be made. In recent game machines, a plurality of various effect displays are performed at the same time, so there is a tendency that they are complicated and difficult to visually recognize. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying “”, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  The first display may include only an icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may necessarily include an icon display frame, or may not include an icon display frame.

  Here, the “icon display frame” may be referred to as “hold display frame”, “hold frame”, “UI”, “hold icon display area”, or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like. Further, since the “icon display frame” is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. In addition, the “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or a hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be said to be a display frame that is overlapped by at least a part of the hold icon or the like. Further, the “icon display frame” is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative design.

  Here, the “icon display frame” is a part that can be recognized by the player as the part where the icon is displayed without being caught by the word “frame”. This is an example and is not bound by this.

  Further, only the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame, or other than the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon is always displayed in the frame inner area, or the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the frame inner area. Good.

  Here, the in-frame region constitutes an icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

  Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. The icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  The icon display frame may be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode may be displayed. It may be a thing. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Also good.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a part in which only a part of the first display mode is expanded, or a part in which all of the first display mode is expanded.

  Here, the “display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  Here, “expansion” can be said to be a display of “icon display frame” in a broad sense, or an area of an image or a region can be increased.

  Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. There may be.

  Here, the “decorative symbol variation display” may include a stop display of the ornamental symbol, a display in a state where the symbol can be identified at the start of variation, or, for example, during a high-speed variation, And display in a state that is difficult to identify than the display state at the start of change and the display state at the start of change (for example, translucent display during high-speed change) It may include a variable display of symbols.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Production display etc.],
Of the second display mode, a portion extended from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expanded part [for example, an extended part in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc. The third display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the extended portion in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The expanded portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the hold display frame FL1 in the expanded display mode has a variable display. 1 and the second decorative pattern are not overlapped]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the icon display frame is expanded and displayed at least in preference to the variation display of the decorative pattern indicating whether or not the variation is appropriate, and the expanded portion is displayed as a notice or a pre-read notice. The effect may be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Here, “effect display” includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is changed, and the like.

  Further, only the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed by being overlapped with the extended portion, or the display other than the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed being overlapped with the extended portion. Further, the third display may be displayed so as to always overlap the extended portion, or the third display may be displayed so as not to overlap the extended portion. Good.

  Here, the “extended portion” may be a difference from the portion before expansion, or may refer to itself when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or enlarged). .

  The extended portion may not be overlapped only by the second display, or may be not overlapped by a display other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may be overlapped with the second display.

Further, “the effect display is a display of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l)”,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc., which are overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a line display [for example, a line display by the princess Chibi character CH1 in the balloon TT2, a line display by the frog character GY1 in the balloon TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 140 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Frame FL1 does not overlap with balloon TT2 or balloon TT3, etc.]
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. Etc., which overlaps the display of lines by Princess Chibi's character CH1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, the “line display” may be referred to as “line advance notice” or “conversation advance notice”, and may include, for example, a change notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, and the like.

  The fourth display may not be overlapped only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, and may be overlapped with other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that do not happen. The fourth display may not necessarily overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

  Here, “the fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode” does not overlap the display position. It is a concept that includes what is configured.

  In addition, the fourth display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

  The “line display” includes a display of the first line and a display of the second line, and the display of the first line may be overlapped with the extended portion. The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. 147 (c -1) to (c-4) shown in the same figure, such as an effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0]
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. Etc., which overlaps the extended part of the hold icon display area FL1]
The third display and the fifth display are partly the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l) As for the display, the effect display which changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) is also shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c−). As for the effect display which changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm whether or not the change is appropriate with a decorative design, an icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with an expanded icon display frame. You may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if the third display and the fifth display are all different, it may be clear whether the change should be expected or whether it should be expected for the subsequent symbol change display. By making a part of the display and the part of the fifth display the same mode, it may be possible to increase the expectation until it can be recognized which of the expected symbol variation displays is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in the expanded portion, a display other than the fifth display may be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be what was done. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner in the extended portion, or the fifth display may not be displayed in the extended portion in an overlapping manner. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the fifth display may be configured so that the fifth display overlaps only in the extended portion, and the fifth display overlaps and can be displayed in portions other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

  Here, the “notice display” may be a change effect of a variation icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or the like.

  Further, “the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display” is a concept including, for example, the same animation until the character appears.

In addition, “the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ the area within the first frame [for example, the area within the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 140 (a) ”). Etc.] ”)) is the first area,
The region in the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second frame region [for example, a region in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i)]”. .) Area is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The extended portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame region and the first in-frame region.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second in-frame area is an area including the first in-frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode The area within the frame is configured to include the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. There may be.

In addition, “the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” according to claim 1 is “the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “Even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame is configured to be able to be displayed in the first display mode [for example, there is no hold and symbol variation display is not performed. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayed only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured to be able to display in a display mode other than the first display mode. The icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in a region other than the icon display frame.

“The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), a variable icon h 0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL 1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon as the icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold icon as the icon. The display means may always display a hold icon as an icon, or may not display a hold icon as an icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended, or corresponding to the number of the symbol variation display starting being suspended. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons to be displayed may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended. May not be displayed.

Further, “the first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap the second display [for example, FIG. 140 (f) to FIG. The extended display mode hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 4 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol variation display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display mode, or may be overlapped with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132. A display area different from a display area [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display that is displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice. The icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132, etc.]
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display that is displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means when displayed.
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [e.g., three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon [here, “the notice icon” here is, for example, FIG. 81 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 15 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc., and “the notice icon” of the “first number of notice icons” May not be displayed in the third display area [for example, in the state where three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage. Displayed on the name display unit ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a9), displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display of “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 129, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a9), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice,
A display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2, balloon section TT2 etc. shown in FIG. 155] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 155]. Displayed on the hold icon h11, h12, etc.] [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 155, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 155, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.
The first display is a character display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 155 (a), etc.]
The second display is a character display [e.g., display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 155 (a), etc.]
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 155] in the display means when displayed.
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 as shown in FIG. 155 (f)],
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.]
A plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (k3), two pseudo notice icons I65 are displayed in the stage name display section ST2. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as a display other than the prefetch notice display (for example, the change notice or the like). Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. May also be displayed. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or when displayed, other than the second display area of the display means. May also be displayed. Further, the second display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display area and the second display area may overlap at least partially or may not overlap. In the first display area and the second display area, the first display area may have a larger area, the second display area may have a larger area, or the same area. There may be. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different shapes or the same shape.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Further, the notice icon may always be displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, only a plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area, or a thing other than the plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may always be displayed in the first display area, or a plurality of notice icons may not be displayed in the first display area.

  In addition, as a character display displayed on the first display area, for example, a display indicating a selected item such as a song title, a selected character, a selected character name, and an effect mode may be used. Here, for example, the effect mode may be one in which the appearance rate of the notice or effect differs for each mode, or the effect content may differ for each mode. Moreover, as a character display displayed in the first display area, for example, it is given based on the number of stays, the stage name, the number of consecutive resorts, and the number of consecutive resorts indicating the number of remaining symbol variations in which a specific effect mode is executed. Displayed in the title, the number of the winning balls during the big hit or in the consecutive game, the number of holds, the level according to the points given as a result of the game, the title given corresponding to this level, and the continuous hit operation effect Display of repeated hitting meter (or display of meter indicating barometer until defeating enemy) The number of pseudo continuous effects that occurred in one pattern change display, effects that are performed during probability change and electric support, defeat It may be a display showing the current situation such as a display of an enemy character (enemies character to be defeated) promised to be a big hit, or a display of an enemy character destroyed.In addition, as other character displays displayed in the first display area, a serif notice, a tutorial display, a function explanation (description of volume changing method, etc.), a type of reach being executed, a mini game, an RTC (Real Time Clock) Aiming for a countdown display until the performance is performed, a mini-screen display during a period during which a specific performance such as an RTC effect is being performed, a mission display, a right-handed or left-handed direction instruction display, and an electric Chu A display for instructing to hit and an instruction display for storing the game ball in a predetermined storage unit may be displayed. Further, all of the character display examples described above may be displayed in the first display area, and some of the character display examples described above may not be displayed in the first display area. Also good.

  Moreover, as a character display displayed in the second display area, for example, a display indicating a selected item such as a song title, a selected character, a selected character name, and an effect mode may be used. Here, for example, the effect mode may be one in which the appearance rate of the notice or effect differs for each mode, or the effect content may differ for each mode. Moreover, as a character display displayed in the second display area, for example, it is given based on the number of stays, the stage name, the number of consecutive resorts, and the number of consecutive resorts that indicate the number of remaining symbol variations in which a specific effect mode is executed. Displayed in the title, the number of the winning balls during the big hit or in the consecutive game, the number of holds, the level according to the points given as a result of the game, the title given corresponding to this level, and the continuous hit operation effect Display of repeated hitting meter (or display of meter indicating barometer until defeating enemy) The number of pseudo continuous effects that occurred in one pattern change display, effects that are performed during probability change and electric support, defeat It may be a display showing the current situation such as a display of an enemy character (enemies character to be defeated) promised to be a big hit, or a display of an enemy character destroyed.In addition, as other character displays displayed in the second display area, serif notice, tutorial display, function explanation (such as explanation of volume changing method), type of reach being executed, mini game, RTC (Real Time Clock) Aiming for a countdown display until the performance is performed, a mini-screen display during a period during which a specific performance such as an RTC effect is being performed, a mission display, a right-handed or left-handed direction instruction display, and an electric Chu A display for instructing to hit and an instruction display for storing the game ball in a predetermined storage unit may be displayed. Further, all of the character display examples described above may be displayed in the second display area, and some of the character display examples described above may not be displayed in the second display area. Also good.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, FIG. 157 (b1) to FIG. As shown in b2), the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started on the tutorial display part TT4 while the two pseudo-annual notice icons I65 are displayed on the stage name display part ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where is displayed, display other than the display of the notice icon may be started in the second display area. In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. In the state, the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. In the displayed state, the display of the notice icon may be started in the display area other than the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The notice icon may always be displayed in the second display area.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the second display area only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the displayed state, the notice icon may start to be displayed in the second display area. When the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The notice icon may be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “a plurality of types of icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]” can be displayed as the notice icon. And
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., pseudo-continuous notice icon I65],
In a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area [for example, FIG. 155 (i) As shown in FIG. 4, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is also displayed on the balloon portion TT2 in a state where one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notification icon, or an icon other than the plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notification icon. In addition, a plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notification icons, or a plurality of types of icons may not be displayed as the notification icons.

  Further, only the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or an icon other than the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon. Further, the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or the first icon may not be displayed as the notice icon.

  In addition, in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, only the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area, or the first display In a state where the first icon is displayed in the area, display other than the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area. In addition, in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may always be started in the second display area, or the first icon may be displayed in the first display area. In the state where the icon is displayed, the display of the first icon may not be started in the second display area.

  In addition, in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of only the first icon may be started in the second display area, or the first display area In the state in which the first icon is displayed, the display of icons other than the first icon may also be started in the second display area. In a state where the icon is displayed, the display of the first icon may always be started in the second display area.

  In addition, only when the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the first icon is displayed in the area, the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area, or the first icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where one icon is displayed, there may be a case where the display of the first icon is always started in the second display area.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. In the state where is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Otherwise, the first display may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the first display is not always displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The first display may be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a2) to (a3), the second button notice icon. When I11 is digested, the stage name display unit ST2 resumes the display of the stage name]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display is resumed in addition to the display of the first display. There may be things. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the icon I65 of the continuous notice is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, the character display of “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the second display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in a state of being displayed, a display other than the second display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the second display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the second display may be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the state where the text is displayed, no text is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, it may be configured not to display only the second display, or the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Then, the display other than the second display may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the second display is not necessarily displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. The second display may be displayed.

  Further, the second display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the stage name display portion ST2 is partitioned by lines into a square shape, etc. ],
The second display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the tutorial display portion TT4 is partitioned by lines into a square shape, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, shown in FIG. 155 (a). In the hold icon display area to be displayed, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 155 (f) (for example, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65) is a special icon. Etc., which is not an icon indicating the number of symbol fluctuation display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means [eg, production buttons 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice,
A display area [for example, tutorial display portion TT4, stage name display portion ST2, balloon portion TT2 etc. shown in FIG. 156] is displayed in the hold icon [eg, hold icon display region shown in FIG. 156]. Is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 156] displayed.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG.
The first display is a character display [for example, a display of “coast stage” displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 156 (a3), etc.]
The second display is a character display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (a1), etc.]
The first display is a display that is displayed in a first display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG.
The second display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 156] in the display means when displayed.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.]
A plurality of types of icons (for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.) can be displayed as the notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a second button notice icon I11, etc.]
The first icon is an icon related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as a display other than the prefetch notice display (for example, the change notice display). Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. May also be displayed. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or when displayed, other than the second display area of the display means. May also be displayed. Further, the second display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display area and the second display area may overlap at least partially or may not overlap. In the first display area and the second display area, the first display area may have a larger area, the second display area may have a larger area, or the same area. There may be. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different shapes or the same shape.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Further, the notice icon may always be displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notice icons, or icons other than the plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notice icons. In addition, a plurality of types of icons may be displayed as the notification icons, or a plurality of types of icons may not be displayed as the notification icons.

  Further, only the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or an icon other than the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon. Further, the first icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or the first icon may not be displayed as the notice icon.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, FIG. 157 (b1) to FIG. As shown in b2), the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started on the tutorial display part TT4 while the two pseudo-annual notice icons I65 are displayed on the stage name display part ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where is displayed, display other than the display of the notice icon may be started in the second display area. In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. In the state, the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. In the displayed state, the display of the notice icon may be started in the display area other than the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The notice icon may always be displayed in the second display area.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the second display area only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the displayed state, the notice icon may start to be displayed in the second display area. When the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The notice icon may be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “the icon relating to the operation means” means “an icon for notifying the occurrence of the button effect” [for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a1) to (a3), the second button The notice icon I11 foresees the occurrence of the button effect]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon relating to the operation means may be a notification that only notifies the occurrence of the button effect, or may be an icon that notifies the occurrence other than the occurrence of the button effect. Further, the icon related to the operation means may be an item that always notifies the occurrence of the button effect, or may be an icon that does not notify the occurrence of the button effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, the pseudo-announcement icon I65 shown in FIG. 155 (f)],
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first icon and the second icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or the icons other than the first icon and the second icon may be displayed as the notice icon. Good. In addition, the first icon and the second icon may be displayed as the notice icon, or the first icon and the second icon may not be displayed as the notice icon. Also good.

In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the displayed state, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Otherwise, the first display may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the first display is not always displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The first display may be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be resumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a2) to (a3), the second button notice icon. When I11 is digested, the stage name display unit ST2 resumes the display of the stage name]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display is resumed in addition to the display of the first display. There may be things. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, the second display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), Even in the state where the two button notice icon I11 is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, the character display of “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the second display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in a state of being displayed, a display other than the second display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the second display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the second display may be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In the state where the text is displayed, no text is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, it may be configured not to display only the second display, or the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Then, the display other than the second display may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the second display is not necessarily displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. The second display may be displayed.

  Further, the second display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, the second display may not be displayed.

The first display area is a display area partitioned by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the stage name display portion ST2 is partitioned by lines into a square shape, etc. ],
The second display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, shown in FIG. 156 (a1). In the hold icon display area to be displayed, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. Etc., which is not an icon indicating the number of symbol fluctuation display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Subsequently, a modified example of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 125 to 157 will be described. The modification here is related to the technical idea of the production described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, and can be combined with the production described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63 unless there is a particular contradiction. These effects can be replaced with the effects described with reference to FIGS. Hereinafter, the above description applies to detailed descriptions, modifications, and extended examples of the same components as those described so far, and detailed descriptions thereof may not be given here.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the second chance button vibrates and emits light during execution of an effect corresponding to the operation of the first chance button.

  Also in FIG. 158, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L, 208M. A first decorative symbol display device 208L (main display device), a second decorative symbol display device 208M (sub display device), and a third decorative symbol display device 208N (sub display device), which are the same as 208N, are shown. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the player can use this light guide plate IL. The display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be visually recognized. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The light guide plate IL has a lens cut in the transmission region. A light source such as an LED is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light source is irradiated from the side to the thickness portion of the light guide plate IL and reflected forward by the lens cut portion, thereby transmitting the light. You can make the area appear to emit light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 158, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating an effect image. The light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 158 (a) does not emit light and is turned off.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the eight generations 224Fa and the generals 224Fb, which are the same as the production movable body described with reference to FIG. 125, are arranged. It is configured to be able to move and swing in the direction. Whether it is the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb shown in FIG. 158 (a), they are in their initial positions. Furthermore, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the same family crest character 224E as the other effect movable body described with reference to FIG. 125 is arranged, and it moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. And can be swung. A family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 158 (a) is also in the initial position. In FIG. 158 (a), these actors 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are all turned on in white, but may be turned off. In addition, the operation of the effect movable body includes rotation and vibration in addition to movement and swing.

  The family crest member 224E, the Yatsushiro role 224Fa, and the general role 224Fb described here are all disposed on the back side of the transparent plate member 118 or the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. The light guide plate IL may be disposed on the back side of the transparent plate member 118, or may be disposed on the player side of the transparent plate member 118.

  Further, the state of the speaker 120 and a circular first chance button (effect button) 136 is shown. Further, FIG. 158 also shows the state of the second chance button 137 corresponding to the second chance button (effect button) shown in FIG. The second chance button 137 here is a horizontally long rounded rectangle so that the difference from the circular first chance button 136 is clear, but it may be the same circular shape. The first chance button 136 has a circular translucent operation surface 136X, and the second chance button 137 has a rounded rectangular translucent operation surface 137X. Regardless of whether the first chance button 136 or the second chance button 137, the operation surfaces 136X and 137X are pushed down by receiving a pressing operation. Both the first chance button 136 and the second chance button 137 each have a light-emitting body such as an LED, and the operation surfaces 136X and 137X emit light when the light-emitting body emits light. Looks like. The illuminator may be disposed behind the operation surfaces 136X and 137X and may be pushed down together with the operation surfaces 136X and 137X, or may be disposed further below the position where the operation surfaces 136X and 137X are most depressed. The position may not be pushed down together with the operation surfaces 136X and 137X, and the position does not change even when the operation surfaces 136X and 137X are pushed down. The light emitter can emit light in full color. The illuminator of the first chance button 136 and the illuminant of the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 158 (a) are both lit in white, and the respective operation surfaces 136X and 137X emit white light. However, in FIG. 158 (a), the light may be turned off. Note that the light emitter may be provided around the operation surfaces 136X and 137X, or may be provided at a position away from the operation surfaces 136X and 137X. However, in any case, each light emitter is a light emitting means that emits light according to the operation of each chance button. The light emitter incorporated in the first chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the second light emission means, and the light emitter incorporated in the second chance button 137 corresponds to an example of the first light emission means.

  The first chance button 136 includes a first vibration means, and the first chance button 136 can vibrate. On the other hand, the second chance button 137 includes a second vibration means, and the second chance button 137 can also vibrate. The first vibration means and the second vibration means are separate vibration means. When the first vibration means vibrates and the second vibration means does not vibrate, the first chance button 136 and If only the first chance button 136 of the second chance buttons 137 vibrates, and conversely, the second vibrating means vibrates and the first vibrating means does not vibrate, the second chance Only button 137 vibrates. Note that both the first chance button 136 and the second chance button 137 may always vibrate by a common vibration means, or the first vibration button is omitted, and the first chance button 136 is You may make it the structure which does not vibrate. The second vibration means may vibrate the entire second chance button 137 or may vibrate only the operation surface 137X. The same applies to the first vibration means. “The second operating means vibrates” in the claims means that “the second vibrating means vibrates when vibrated”. That is, the vibration by the vibration means provided exclusively for the second chance button 137 is transmitted, and the entire second chance button 137 or a part of the operation surface 137X vibrates. The vibration of the vibration means for vibrating the ball launching handle 134 shown in FIG. 1 or the like, or the vibration of the vibration means for vibrating the operation means different from the second chance button 137, results in the second chance button 137. It is a vibration that clearly shows that the second chance button 137 is oscillating, rather than being transmitted and being vibrated slightly. “The second operating means does not vibrate” means “the second vibrating means does not vibrate”. Further, “the first operating means vibrates” means “vibrates when the first vibrating means vibrates”, and “the first operating means does not vibrate” means “the first operating means does not vibrate”. The vibration means does not vibrate. "

  The first chance button 136 and the second chance button 137 described here are arranged closer to the player than the transparent plate member 118 or the light guide plate IL shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, even if it is the 1st chance button 136 or the 2nd chance button 137, the reflective surface which reflects irregularly when it vibrates is provided in the operation surfaces 136X, 137X, etc. so that it can be seen visually that it vibrates. Yes.

  Instead of the second chance button 137, a transmission part (glass button) 191 of the transmission part unit 190 may be applied. As described above, the transmission part 191 can be rotated in the front-rear direction. The transmission part 191 functions as an operation means (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable means. In addition, a transparent light guide plate that is the same as the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 158 (a) or the like may be incorporated in the transmission portion 191 so that the light guide plate also rotates. By doing so, the transmissive portion 191 that functions as an operation means (button) can emit light. In addition, the first chance button 136, the second chance button 137, and the transmission portion 191 may be provided, and three kinds of operation means capable of vibrating and emitting light may be provided.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the transmissive part 191 is used as the operation means in the above description (for example, the examples shown in FIG. 21 and FIGS. 23 to 28), the transmissive part 191 is replaced with FIG. The second chance button 137 may be used as shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (a), a user interface (UI) portion is provided at the lower part of the display screen (effect display area 208d). A fluctuation icon display area 208e is arranged, a hold icon display area 208f is arranged on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side thereof. The hold icon display area 208f displays a hold icon representing the number of holds depending on the displayed number, and the fluctuation icon display area 208e displays the symbol fluctuation display after the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the hold icon is started. A variation icon displayed as an icon corresponding to is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 158 (a), the variation display of the special figure is stopped, the variation icon is not displayed, and only the cross-hatched background image in the variation icon display area 208e is displayed. On the other hand, in the hold icon display area 208f, the four symbol variation displays of Special Figure 1 are held, so that the hold icon display area 208f displays four hold icons h11-14. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. No explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.

  In addition, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (a), and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. “Decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208c. Hereinafter, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a first decorative symbol.

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M (sub display device) on the left side shown in FIG. 158 (a) has an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed at the bottom of the display screen. The stage name display part ST1 is arranged. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 158 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The background display for each of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 158 (a) is a castle town background display (first background display). In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stop display of the second decorative symbol which is a mini decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 158 (a), a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In FIG. 158 (a), “4” is displayed as the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and “0” is displayed as the second hold number display in FIG. Also, on the right side, the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. The 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is a square display, and the 4th symbol of Special Figure 2 is a round display. Any of the fourth symbols is displayed in black when the symbol is stopped, and is displayed in white when the symbol is changing.

  In FIG. 158 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has three held icons (h11 to h13) that have been displayed so far, and the variation icon In the display area 208e, the display of the change icon h0 is started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 that has been displayed here is the default display mode. In the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation of “Panda is a master of the panda” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the panda character is described. In the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 158 (b), the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 158 (b), the second reserved number display of special figure 1 is “3”, and the square fourth graphic of special figure 1 is displayed in white. Has changed.

  In FIG. 158 (c), the variation display of the first decorative symbol has entered the reach state. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol, which is a mini decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, continues to display the same variation as before.

  In FIG. 158 (d), an effect of whether or not to develop into super reach is started. This roaring effect is a notice effect related to super reach, and it is also a notice effect related to big hit because it is easy to make a big hit when it develops into super reach. When the roaring effect is started, the first decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is reduced on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol which is a mini decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also displayed in a reach manner with a delay of one tempo from the timing of FIG. 158 (c). By delaying the tempo by 1 tempo than the first decorative symbol, attention can be drawn to the first decorative symbol at the timing of FIG. 158 (c). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (d), a button effect is started instead of the first decorative symbol. In the button effect here, a button image 136a imitating the first chance button 136, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of the first chance button 136, and the first chance button 136 The remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation as valid is displayed as one set. In addition, the first chance button 136 that has been lit white until now is switched to red lighting at the same time as the button effect starts. The button image 136a is also an image imitating the first chance button 136 that is lit in red. Note that the first chance button 136 may be switched to red before the start of displaying the button image 136a, after that, or at the same time. In FIG. 158 (d), neither the first chance button 136 nor the second chance button 137 vibrates, but only the first chance button 136 that requires an operation may be vibrated.

  The first chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 158 (e). Then, the display of the button image 136a and the like disappears, and the first chance button 136 returns from lighting in red to lighting in white. Then, as shown in FIG. 158 (f), the crest character 224E, which has been lit white at the initial position so far, is switched to blue lighting and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move up. More specifically, the family crest actor 224E passes through the variation icon display area 208e and stops immediately above the variation icon display area 208e. In the light guide plate IL, a pattern imitating an effect image starts to emit white light. A part of the pattern that emits white light overlaps at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the light guide plate IL starts to emit light. Further, the pattern that emits white light looks like a pattern that spreads around the raised family crest member 224E. The rising start of the family crest character 224E and the light emission start timing of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, either one of them may be first, or the rising crest character 224E may be stopped and guided. The light emission start timing of the optical plate IL may be simultaneous, or one of them may be first. The production shown in FIG. 158 (f) is a climax production in the production production.

  In FIG. 158 (g), the roaring effect has ended, and it has developed into a swordsman reach, one of the super reach. That is, the white light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the rising family crest member 224E is also returned to the initial position. Note that the family crest member 224 emits blue light even when it returns to the initial position. The background image of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N changes from the castle town to the wilderness, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. Displayed, “Swordsman Reach” is displayed on the stage name display section ST1 of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the entire user interface (UI) portion is not displayed. As a result, the change icon h0, the frame display that demarcates the change icon display area 208e where the change icon h0 was displayed, the hold icons h11 to h13, and the tutorial display section TT1 disappear.

  158 (d) to FIG. 10 (f), if the super-reach is not developed, the effect of the family crest actor 224E and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed as shown in FIG. There are cases where this is not done, and there are cases where it is performed as a fake production. Alternatively, there is a case where the rendering operation of the family crest character 224E is different from the figure (f) or the light emission color of the light guide plate IL is different.

  Further, in the hit effect here, a button effect using the first chance button 136 is performed, but for example, a button effect using the second chance button 137 may be performed.

  Also, the background screen switching timing, the white light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL, and the start timing of the initial position return operation of the family crest member 224E may be the same or even if all three are shifted. Alternatively, the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL and the restoration operation start timing of the family crest member 224E may be the same, and the background screen switching timing may be earlier or later. Alternatively, the background screen switching timing, the white light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL, and the completion timing of the initial position return operation of the family crest member 224E may be simultaneous, or even if all three are shifted. The light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL and the restoration operation completion timing of the family crest actor 224E may be the same, and the background screen switching timing may be earlier or later.

  Further, even when the button chance effect of the first chance button 136 is started and the first chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the climax effect shown in FIG. 158 (f) is started. . Whether or not to develop into a super reach is determined in advance by production lottery, and is independent of whether or not the first chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. However, if the first chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period and develops into super reach, the climax effect is not performed intentionally, and the animation display of the scene shown in FIG. 158 (g) is started suddenly. Also good.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (h), as part of the super reach effect, an in-animation IA that is a new button effect is displayed between Tono and Swordsman. In the in-animation IA, an image of the second chance button 137 that emits white light (in a normal mode) is displayed from a flashing display, or an image of the second chance button 137 that emits red light (in a special mode). An image is displayed, or an image of another button (for example, the first chance button 136) or another operation means (for example, the transmissive portion (glass button) 191) is displayed. The flashing display here overlaps part of Tonosama and part of the swordsman.

  In FIG. 158 (i), an image of the second chance button 137 in the special mode is displayed. That is, a button effect is started and a button image 137a simulating the second chance button 137 that is lit in red, and a PUSH character display as a promotion display that prompts the operation (pressing) of the second chance button 137 The remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the second chance button 137 as an effective one is displayed as one set. The display that these three became one set overlaps a part of Tono-sama and a part of swordsman. Further, the second chance button 137 that has been lit white until now is switched to red lighting at the same time as the button effect is started. Note that the second chance button 137 may be switched to red before the start of displaying the button image 137a, after that, or at the same time. In FIG. 158 (i), neither the first chance button 136 nor the second chance button 137 vibrates, but only the second chance button 137 that requires an operation may be vibrated. The button effect here is also an effect started in response to the operation of the first chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 158 (e).

  In FIG. 158 (j), the time elapses and the meter in the remaining period meter display 137c decreases. In FIG. 158 (k), the time elapses and the meter in the remaining period meter display 137c decreases by about 1/3. ing. When the meter is reduced by about 1/3, characters that have been hidden behind the meter (here, “celebration” characters) appear. This character may be a character indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot in the currently performed symbol variation, and the “celebration” may be a character suggesting defeat of the jackpot. In addition to “celebration”, characters such as “×” with a jackpot expectation degree of 1%, “heat” with a jackpot expectation degree of 70%, and “?” With an unknown jackpot expectation degree are displayed.

  When the second chance button 137 is operated at the timing of FIG. 158 (k), as shown in FIG. 158 (l), the display of the button image 137a and the like disappears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the background image of the wilderness is switched to the effect type background image. The effect type background image is also a background image that hides the entire user interface (UI) portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the crest character 224E that is lit in blue at the initial position switches to a light emission mode (so-called rainbow light emission mode) in which the light emission changes to seven colors, and rises again to the position that has been increased at the timing of FIG. In the light guide plate IL, a pattern imitating an effect image starts to emit yellow light. Again, the pattern that emits yellow light looks like a pattern that spreads around the raised family crest member 224E. Note that the light emission color of the light guide plate IL is different from that in FIG. 158 (f). This is because a plurality of lens cuts are formed in a laminated state on the light guide plate IL, and the light source can emit light in a plurality of colors. Therefore, light emission of a plurality of colors is possible. Moreover, if the light emission pattern (pattern) is made to correspond to a different pattern for each lens cut formed in the laminated state, a plurality of light emission patterns (patterns) are possible. Furthermore, although the eight generations 224Fa and the generals 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L have been lit in white so far, they are switched to the rainbow light emission mode, and as indicated by arrows. It swings up and down. In addition, the second chance button 137 is switched from red lighting to rainbow light emission mode. In addition, the first chance button 136, which has been lit white so far, is also switched to the rainbow light emission mode, and further, the first chance button 136 is vibrated by the vibration of the first vibration means. . Here, the second chance button 137 does not vibrate.

  Here, the start timing of rising of the family crest character 224E and the timing of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL may be the same, or one of them may be first, or the rising crest character 224E is stopped. (Upward position arrival) and the light emission start timing of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, or one of them may be first. The rising start timing of the family crest member 224E may coincide with the switching timing of the background image, may be before or after that timing. Further, the rising position arrival timing of the family crest character 224E may coincide with the switching timing of the background image, may be before or after that timing. Furthermore, the light emission start timing of the light guide plate IL may coincide with the switching timing of the background image, may be before or after that timing. For example, at the same time that the family crest member 224E reaches the rising position, the background image may be switched and the light guide plate IL may start to emit light. Further, the background image may be switched first, and then the family crest member 224E may start to rise, and the light guide plate IL may also start to emit light. Alternatively, the light guide plate IL may start to emit light first, then the background image may be switched, and the family crest member 224E may start to rise. The vibration start timing of the first chance button 136 may also coincide with the switching timing of the background image, may coincide with the rising start timing of the family crest character 224E, or may be the same as the crest character 224E. It may coincide with the rising position arrival timing or may coincide with the light emission start timing of the light guide plate IL.

  The family crest character 224E corresponds to an example of a first effect unit, and the effect operation of the family crest character 224E from FIGS. 158 (l) to (n) corresponds to an example of a first effect operation. The yellow light emission of the light guide plate IL corresponds to the light emission of the second mode, the light guide plate IL also corresponds to an example of the first effect means, and the yellow light emission of the light guide plate IL is an example of the first effect operation. Is also equivalent. Further, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb also correspond to an example of the first effect means, and the effect operations of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb also correspond to an example of the first effect operation.

  In the button effect using the first chance button 136 performed in the turn effect in FIGS. 158 (d) to (f), when the first chance button 136 is operated (pressed), the first decoration is displayed. The crest character 224E arranged below the symbol display device 208L has moved up to the front side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but this crest character combination arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Instead of the ascending movement of the object 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb may fall to the front side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In particular, in FIG. 158 (l), the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are swinging up and down, which seems to be a precursor motion of the falling motion, but the first chance to vibrate Even if the button 136 is operated, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb do not fall. That is, during the period in which the first chance button 136 is oscillating, even if the first chance button 136 is operated, there is no change in performance (nothing happens). In other words, the operation of the vibrating first chance button 136 is not accepted or invalidated. However, when the first chance button 136 is operated, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb may fall, which seems interesting. Such an expectation can be given to the player, and there are cases where the player can be interested in the operation of the first chance button 136 when the player is not vibrating.

  In FIG. 158 (m), the combined objects 224L and 224R that have been hidden so far in the initial position of the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L have fallen to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the family crest character A uniting operation is performed in which the object 224E is sandwiched from the left and right and integrated with the family crest member 224E. The combined objects 224L and 224R also emit light in the rainbow light emission mode. Here, the combined characters 224L and 224R correspond to an example of the second rendering means, and the combined operation of the combined characters 224L and 224R (the combined operation or / and the light emitting operation in the rainbow light emission mode) is the second rendered operation. It corresponds to an example. Also in FIG. 158 (m), an effect type background image is displayed, and the family crest actor 224E emits light in a rainbow light emitting manner at the ascending position. In addition, yellow light emission continues in the light guide plate IL, and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb continue to swing while emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode. Furthermore, both the second chance button 137 and the first chance button 136 emit light in a rainbow light emission mode, and only the first chance button 136 vibrates.

  In FIG. 158 (n), the combined objects 224L and 224R return to the initial position of the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and become invisible, but other situations are the same as those in FIG. 158 (m).

  In FIG. 158 (o), the crest character 224E that was in the raised position returns to the initial position, but the other situations are the same as those in FIG. 158 (n). The crest character 224E that has returned to the initial position emits light in the rainbow light emission mode even at the initial position.

  In FIG. 158 (p), the yellow light emission in the light guide plate IL is finished, and the background images in the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched from the effect type to the wilderness, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In addition to the text “Victory”, the enemy swordsman fell and the hero's lord won. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb continue to swing while emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode, and the family crest character 224E also emits light in the rainbow light emission mode at the initial position. Further, both the second chance button 137 and the first chance button 136 emit light in a rainbow light emission mode, and only the first chance button 136 vibrates.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (q), the display of the first decorative symbol which has been reduced and displayed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restored and overlaps the display screen shown in FIG. In this manner, the symbol of “decoration 3” fluctuates and fluctuates in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Note that the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is still displayed in a reach manner (the middle symbol is a fluctuating feature). Further, at the same time as the display of the first decorative symbol is restored to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the vibration of the first chance button 136 is ended. The first chance button 136 continues to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode even after the vibration is finished. The second chance button 137 also continues to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 158 (r), the first decorative symbol is fixedly displayed as “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays the first decoration symbol. 2 decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in 3 sets. In addition, the quadrangular fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a black display. When the confirmation display is performed, the operations of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb that have continued the rocking motion until then are stopped. However, both the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb continue to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode. The family crest member 224E also continues to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode at the initial position. Further, both the first chance button 136 and the second chance button 137 continue to emit light in the rainbow light emission mode.

  On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 158 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the character display of “sorry” and the appearance that the hero's lord fell down and the enemy swordsman won, and then lost. In some cases, the symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, even if the character display of “sorry” is displayed, there may be a reverse effect in which the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. On the contrary, the character display of “hit” is displayed. In addition, there may be a case where the final symbol is finally displayed.

  Note that the start of descending of the family crest member 224E and the timing of the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, or the timing of the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be earlier. Further, the timing at which the family crest member 224E reaches the initial position and the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, or the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL may be earlier. . Further, the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL and the timing at which the background image is switched from the wilderness to the effect type may be simultaneous, or the background image switching timing may be earlier. Further, the swinging motion of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb may be ended when the background image is switched, may be ended when the family crest character 224E starts to descend, or the family crest character is used. It may end at the timing when the object 224E reaches the initial position, or may end at the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL. The same applies to the end of light emission in the rainbow light emission mode of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, and the same applies to the end of light emission in the rainbow light emission mode of the second chance button 137.

  Further, the first chance button 136 that has started to vibrate from FIG. 158 (i) continues to vibrate even when operated (pressed), but may be stopped when operated. However, even in this case, it does not affect other effects. Further, the first chance button 136 may stop the vibration when the first chance button 136 is operated not in the normal operation mode (short press) but in a special operation mode such as long press or continuous hit. Further, the vibration of the first chance button 136 may end when the second chance button 137 is operated again, or may end when the background image is switched, or the family crest character 224E is displayed. It may end at the timing when the descent starts, may end at the timing when the crest character 224E reaches the initial position, or may end at the light emission end timing of the light guide plate IL. Further, the first chance button 136 may end the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode when the vibration ends, and conversely, the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode continues even if the vibration ends. It may be. In addition, when the first chance button 136 finishes emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode, the second chance button 137 may end light emission in the rainbow light emitting mode. The button 137 may continue light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 158 described above, the first chance button 136 corresponds to an example of the second operation means, and the second chance button 137 corresponds to an example of the first operation means. Further, the red light emission mode of the first chance button 136 corresponds to the first mode, and the rainbow light emission mode corresponds to the second mode. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o) started in response to the operation of the second chance button 137 (first operation means) correspond to an example of the first effect. The effects shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o) are notice effects related to the current symbol variation, and more specifically correspond to an example of a so-called judge effect. In the example shown in FIG. 158, FIGS. 158 (d) to (f) are also judgment effects on whether or not to develop into super reach, and the effects of FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o) It can be said that it is the final judge production (final judge production of whether to win or not). More strictly speaking, this judgment effect (first effect) is started at or just before the background image in the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N switches from the wilderness to the effect type. It can be seen that the production ends at the time of returning or immediately before. Alternatively, it may be seen that the first effect is started when the crest character 224E in the initial position starts to rise, and the first effect starts when the crest character 224E reaches the raised position. It may be seen that the first effect is started when the light guide plate IL starts to emit light, and the first effect is started when the first chance button 136 starts to vibrate. You can see it. Further, the point in time when the judgment result shown in FIG. 158 (p) is displayed may be regarded as the end of the judgment effect (first effect), or the reduced display as shown in FIG. 158 (q). The point in time when the display of one decorative symbol has returned to its original size may be regarded as the end of the judge effect (first effect), or until just before the final display shown in FIG. 158 (r). Production). In addition, the confirmation display shown in FIG. 158 (r) may be included as a judgment effect (first effect). Further, the family crest member 224E corresponds to an example of the first effect means, and the movement from the initial position (first position) to the ascending position (second position) or the initial position (first position) The reciprocating operation returning from the first position) to the initial position through the ascending position (second position) corresponds to an example of the first effect operation. In addition, the combined character 224L, 224R corresponds to an example of a second effect means, and moves from an initial position (first position) to a combined position (second position) that combines with the family crest character 224E. Alternatively, the reciprocating operation that returns from the initial position (first position) to the initial position through the combined position (second position) corresponds to an example of a second effect operation. Further, the eight-generation role 224Fa and the general role 224Fb arranged on the first decorative symbol display device 208L correspond to an example of the third effect means, and the swing motion corresponds to an example of the third effect operation. To do.

  Further, even if the vibrating first chance button 136 is operated between FIGS. 158 (l) to (p), the climax effect shown in FIG. 158 (f) is not started, and FIG. The judge performance started in l) is continued. That is, the judgment effect (first effect) started in FIG. 158 (l) is not the operation system notice effect of the first chance button 136 (second operation means). Further, the judgment effect (first effect) started in FIG. 158 (l) is an effect that does not include a notification that prompts the user to operate the first chance button 136, and the first chance button 136 is operated. It is an effect that does not include a notification regarding the result, an effect that does not include a notification that changes depending on the operation status of the first chance button 136, an effect that does not include a notification regarding the operation of the first chance button 136, and the first It is an effect that does not change between when the chance button 136 is operated and when it is not operated, and when the first chance button 136 is operated, nothing is changed (nothing is performed). The operation of the chance button 136 is not accepted or ignored by the sub-control unit (400, 500) or the sub-control unit (400, 500). 00) it is also a director would be disabled by side.

  In addition, the judgment effect (first effect) started in FIG. 158 (l) is the same as the first chance button 136 (second operation means) for the second chance button 137 (first operation means). Is the same. That is, it is an effect that does not include a notification that prompts the user to operate the second chance button 137 (first operation means), an effect that does not include a notification regarding the result of operating the second chance button 137, and the second It is also an effect that does not include notifications that change depending on the operation status of the second chance button 137, and an effect that does not include notifications regarding the operation of the second chance button 137, and when the second chance button 137 is operated and when not operated. It is also an effect that does not change at all, an effect that nothing changes even if the second chance button 137 is operated, and the operation of the second chance button 137 is performed by the sub-control unit (400). , 500) side is not accepted, ignored, or invalidated on the sub-control unit (400,500) side There is also. However, the second chance button 137 (first operation means) may be the opposite of what has been described above. Thus, in the opposite case, nothing happens when the vibrating first chance button 136 (second operation means) is operated, but the second chance button 137 not vibrating (first). If the operation means) is operated, something happens (changes in the production), so there is a case where it becomes a hidden production and is particularly appreciated by advanced users. In addition, since there is a temporary law that a hidden effect is activated when the same operation means as the operation means operated last time is operated, even beginners have fun to try the operation means, and the fun of gaming is May improve.

  In addition, even if the button effect of the second chance button 137 is started in FIG. 158 (i) and the second chance button 137 is not operated within the operation valid period, the judge effect (first effect) ) Is started. That is, even if the second chance button 137 is not operated within the operation effective period, the judgment effect (first effect) is started. Here, the contents of the judgment effect (first effect) may be changed depending on whether or not the second chance button 137 is operated within the operation effective period, but it may be operated. The same contents (for example, the same animation is displayed) may be used without them.

  According to the effect of FIG. 158, the first chance button 136 that is not related to the final judge effect starting from FIG. 158 (l) continues to vibrate from FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. When it is possible to draw attention to the player or attract the player's interest even for the first chance button 136 and then the production started by operating the first chance button 136 There is. As a result, the player may want to experience the effect of operating the first chance button 136, and may be able to promote a willingness to continue the game.

  In addition, in the final judge production, the various actors 224E, 224Fa, and 224Fb can be operated to increase the atmosphere and increase the expectation of the final judge. In addition, in the case where a bonus (in this case, a family crest bonus 224E) is started when the first chance button 136 is operated, the player is given the first chance. In some cases, it may be desirable to experience the effect of operating the button 136.

  Furthermore, since the first chance button 136 vibrates regardless of the production, it may not be noticed even if it vibrates, but the first chance button 136 has a different light emission mode than before. By emitting light in a certain rainbow light emitting mode, it may be possible to easily notice the vibration of the first chance button 136. Furthermore, although the rainbow light emission mode has been described here as an example, the light emission mode is not limited to this, and the rainbow light emission mode may be changed to flashing light emission or may be flashing light emission from the beginning. In some cases, the flashing emission can make it easier to notice the vibration of the first chance button 136.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the setting operation.

  FIG. 159 (a) is the same state as the state of FIG. 158 (e), and an effect of whether or not to develop into super reach is performed. In other words, the special symbol is changing. More specifically, it is a reach state. The roaring effect here includes an effect setting for selecting and setting the type of reach. In FIG. 159 (a), the first decorative symbol in the reach state moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is reduced and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the first decorative pattern 08, an A reach option is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, a B reach option is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and an X reach option is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The arrow cursor for selecting these three options moves at high speed in the order of “A reach option” → “B reach option” → “X reach option” → “A reach option” →. ing. In FIG. 159 (a), an arrow cursor is displayed at "A reach option". Note that the greater the number of filled stars described in each reach option, the higher the expectation of the big hit, and the big hit will be confirmed if it develops to X reach. Also in FIG. 159 (a), the first chance button 136 is lit red, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a button image 136a simulating the first chance button 136 lit red, An arrow display 136b as a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of the first chance button 136, and a remaining period meter as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the first chance button 136 as valid. Three displays 136c are displayed as one set. When the first chance button 136 is operated (pressed) within the effective period, the arrow cursor is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the operation. That is, the operation of the first chance button 136 here corresponds to the determination operation. The player operates the first chance button 136 with the aim of stopping the cursor of the arrow in “X reach option”. However, the reach type selection setting here is a completed race, and the arrow cursor is stopped and displayed only for the reach option determined in the effect lottery performed in advance on the sub-control unit (400, 500) side. . Further, even when the first chance button 136 is not operated within the effective period, the cursor of the arrow is stopped and displayed on the reach option predetermined in the effect lottery. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), the reach effect data may be read out or prepared to be read out as the setting of the reach effect scheduled to be executed before the cursor of the arrow is stopped and displayed. Then, after the cursor of the arrow is stopped and displayed, the data of the reach effect may be read as the setting of the reach effect scheduled to be executed. However, in any case, if the first chance button 136 is operated (pressed) within the effective period, the arrow cursor is stopped and displayed, and the reach effect selected here is set and started. Therefore, the reach type selection operation corresponds to a kind of setting operation.

  The reach effect in which the cursor of the arrow is stopped is executed in place of the swordsman reach that starts from FIG. 158 (g), and the same button effect as the button effect in FIGS. 158 (h) to (k). When the second chance button 137 is operated, a notice effect (first effect) which is a judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o) is executed.

  FIG. 159A is a diagram showing a volume setting operation screen output from the speaker 120. FIG. 159A shows a first chance button 136 and a left instruction key 181aL and a right instruction key 181aR among the cross keys 181a shown in FIG. The first chance button 136 shown in FIG. 159 (A) is lit red. The state shown in FIG. 159 (A) is a state in which the symbol fluctuation of the special figure is stopped. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 159 (A), both the square fourth symbol in FIG. 1 and the round fourth symbol in FIG. 2 are displayed in black. Further, “0” is displayed as the second hold number display of the special figure 1, and “0” is also displayed as the second hold number display of the special figure 2. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (A) is a volume setting screen switched from during demonstration display. For example, in the demonstration display, a transition button for transitioning to this volume setting screen is prepared, and the cursor is moved to the transition button using the cross key 181a shown in FIG. When the user presses 136, the sound volume setting screen is displayed. On this volume setting screen, the first chance of lighting in red with the character display “Volume setting”, the level display 120L representing the volume being selected in five levels, and the character display “Determine when button pressed” is displayed. A button image 136a simulating the button 136 and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of the first chance button 136 are displayed. Note that when the volume is set, the operation valid period of the first chance button 136 is not provided, and the remaining period meter display 136c is not displayed. When setting the volume, when the left instruction key 181aL is pressed once, the volume is decreased by one level in the level display 120L, and when the right instruction key 181aR is pressed once, the volume is decreased by one level in the level display 120L. Go up. That is, the level display 120L corresponds to a display that displays options for the currently selected volume level. The operation of the left instruction key 181aL and the right instruction key 181aR here corresponds to a selection operation. When the first chance button 136 is pressed, the sound volume is set to the level displayed by the level display 120L when the button is pressed. That is, the operation of the first chance button 136 here also corresponds to the determination operation.

  The operation for volume setting described above corresponds to an example of the setting operation. In this example, the sound volume setting operation was performed while the special symbol change was stopped. However, the volume setting operation may be performed while the special symbol change display is being performed. May be prohibited or regulated.

  FIG. 159A is a diagram illustrating a music setting operation screen output from the speaker 120. FIG. 159A shows the first chance button 136 that is lit red. The state shown in FIG. 159 (a) is a state in which a big hit game is being played. That is, it is also in a state where the symbol fluctuation of the special figure is stopped. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 159 (A), a character display such as “Big hit” is displayed. More specifically, the state shown in FIG. 159 (a) is a state before the start of the big hit game (before the start of one round) or an inter-round interval state. If round digestion is in progress, the number of rounds being digested is displayed. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (A), the character display “music selection”, “01: music A” as a selectable option, and “02: music” are displayed. “B” and “03: Song C” are displayed, and the cursor of the arrow that moves downward when the first chance button 136 is operated once is aligned with the display of “01: Song A”. . When the first chance button 136 is operated once while the arrow cursor is aligned with the display of “03: song C”, the arrow cursor moves to the display of “01: song A”. Further, on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (a), a button image simulating the first chance button 136 that is lit in red, with the character display “cursor movement when the button is pressed”. 136a and an arrow display 136b as a prompt display for prompting the operation (pressing) of the first chance button 136 are displayed. The operation of the first chance button 136 here corresponds to a selection operation. On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 159 (A), the remaining selection time of “5 seconds remaining” is displayed. In the music setting operation here, the selection time is determined in advance, and when the remaining time of the selection time becomes 0 seconds, the music is set to the music on which the cursor of the arrow is set, and from the speaker 120 during the big hit game The set music is output. If the first chance button 136 is not pressed once, the cursor of the arrow remains in alignment with the display of “01: song A”, and song A is set.

  The operation for music selection described above corresponds to an example of a setting operation. In this example, the music setting operation was performed during the jackpot game. However, the music setting operation may be performed during the demonstration display or during the special symbol variation display. It may be prohibited or restricted during the symbol variation display. In addition, when lyrics are attached to the music, the first chance button 136 may be used to set whether or not to display the lyrics on the display means.

  Other setting operations include, for example, a setting operation of the light quantity and luminance of the light emitter incorporated in the first chance button 136, the light emitter incorporated in the second chance button 137, and other light emitting means. For example, the setting operation of the light amount and the luminance, and the setting operation of the original mode.

  As described above, the first chance button 136 that vibrates in the final judge effect starting from FIG. 158 (l) is an operation means used for various setting operations, and the operation means is an effect ( In this case, it may seem that it is urged to make various settings by oscillating regardless of the final judge production), giving the player attention, interest or suggesting various setting operations thereafter. You can also. For example, in the jackpot game that continues from FIG. 158 (r), it can be suggested that music selection can be performed as shown in FIG. 159 (a), and may lead to promotion of music selection.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples in which icons related to the second chance button 137 are displayed.

  The state of FIG. 160 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 158 (b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition to the display, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 160 (a), a part icon p1 of “+1” indicating the number of parts necessary for stocking the button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is displayed. Has appeared. The button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is an icon for notifying that the button production of the second chance button 137 is started, and is an icon imitating the second chance button 137. On the other hand, the parts icon p1 is an icon that appears at every timing. For example, it appears when winning the effect lottery, appears according to the number of symbol variations of the special figure, or appears according to the elapsed time. The part icon p1 may have an icon shape such as a sphere. Further, two parts or three parts may be represented by the color of the part icon p1 or the characters “× 2” or “× 2”.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 160 (a), a second button meter 137m simulating the shape of the second chance button 137 is placed on the stage name display portion ST1 where “castle town” is displayed. It is displayed. The second button meter 137m is composed of four parts, like the button meter 136m described with reference to FIG. 156, and the parts are accumulated when the above-described part icon p1 appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 160 (a), no parts have been stored yet. Above the second button meter 137m, the remaining digestible number of times (that is, the number of stocks) of the button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. "0 times" is displayed, informing that there is no button notice icon of the second chance button 137 that can be digested. The second button meter 137m may be always displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 160 (b), the part icon p1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is deleted, and one part of the second button meter 137m is stored. In the display of the second button meter 137m, the part where the parts are accumulated lights up in red.

  In FIG. 160 (c), up to three parts of the second button meter 137m are stored, and when one more is stored, the tank is full. The part icon p1 described above appears in various places, and may appear in the background display as shown in FIG. 160 (a), or may appear in the tutorial display section TT1, or a dialogue notice display may appear. If it has been done, it may appear in the dialogue notice display. FIG. 160 (c) shows the appearance of the part icon p1 in the tutorial display section TT1.

  When there is one more state until the tank is full, the tutorial display unit TT1 may notify the fact, or the number of parts until the tank is full may be always displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. It may be displayed temporarily like a tutorial. For example, immediately after one item is stored, “Let's save the part if it is in condition” may be temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the second button meter 137m is full. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 160 (e), the second chance button 137 is displayed. The remaining noticeable number of times the button notice icon of the button becomes “one more time”, it is informed that one button notice icon of the second chance button 137 has been stocked, and the second button meter 137m, There is a change to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the background images of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N change from the castle town to the wilderness, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main character, Are displayed in the stage name display section ST1 of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The state shown in FIG. 160 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 158 (h), and an in-animation IA serving as a button effect is displayed between Tono-sama and the swordsman. In the state of FIG. 160 (f), since one button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is stocked, the image of the second chance button 137 is displayed in the flashing display of the in-animation IA. That will be confirmed. In FIG. 160 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a flashing display so as to cover the entire second button meter 137m, and from this flashing display, a button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is displayed. 137I moves into the flashing display of the in-animation IA displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 is digested, and the button of the second chance button 137 Production begins. That is, in FIG. 160 (g), as in FIG. 158 (i), the button image 137a imitating the second chance button 137 lit in red on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second PUSH character display as a promotion display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 137, and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the second chance button 137 as valid Are displayed as a set. Further, the second chance button 137 that has been lit white until now is switched to red lighting at the same time as the button effect is started. Thereafter, the same effects as those after FIG. 158 (j) are executed. That is, when the operation means (here, the second chance button 137) of the second button meter 137m is operated, the same notice effect (first effect as the judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o)). ) Is executed, and the other operation means (here, the first chance button 136) starts to vibrate. It should be noted that the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 160 (f) is a display mode that is lit in red.

  In the production example described above, if the second button meter 137m is not full, the notice production (first production) will not be executed. First, the second button meter 137m is used to create a second chance. Focusing on the button 137 (first operation means), the second chance button 137 is operated to start the notice effect (first effect), and further, by the notice effect (first effect). In some cases, attention may be paid to other operation means (here, the first chance button 136 corresponding to the second operation means).

  There may be an icon displayed as “+8” as the parts icon p1. This “+8” display icon corresponds to two button notice icons of the second chance button 137. In addition, there may be a case where an icon of “+3” appears as the part icon p1 in a state where the second button meter 137m shown in FIG. In this case, one button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is stocked, and up to two parts of the second button meter 137m are accumulated, but the part exceeding the full tank (here two parts) May be disabled.

  In addition, when the display of the remaining digestible number of times of the button notice icon of the second chance button 137 is “0 more” and the second button meter 137m is full, the display changes to “one more”. However, instead of this display, a display of a timer effect until the button effect of the second chance button 137 is activated (a countdown effect of the remaining time until activation) may be displayed. Or you may make it display the display of a timer effect with the display of the remaining digestible frequency | count. Further, when a plurality of button notice icons for the second chance button 137 are stocked, a plurality of displays of the timer effect are displayed.

  Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may display the button meter 136m described with reference to FIG. 156 together with the second button meter 137m.

  The state of FIG. 160 (d ′) is a state in which the second button meter 137m is full, as in the state of FIG. 160 (d). The user interface (UI) portion in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 160 (d ′) is the same as the user interface (UI) portion in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. Such a UI unit. That is, the UI part in FIG. 160 (d ′) includes a change icon display area 208e that completely matches the size of the change icon h0, a hold icon display area 208f divided into four, and a first tutorial display part TTR. The second tutorial display part TTL is integrated. Although nothing is displayed on the first tutorial display section TTR or the second tutorial display section TTL shown in FIG. 160 (d ′), the current stage name, description of the production, etc. are displayed. There may be. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 160 (d ′) does not display the remaining digestible number of times of the button notice icon of the second chance button 137.

  In FIG. 160 (d ′) following FIG. 160 (d ′), a button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and this button notice icon 137I is displayed in the second tutorial. It moves to the part TTL and is displayed on the second tutorial display part TTL. In the second tutorial display portion TTL, a character display “STOCK” is displayed so as to protrude from the second tutorial display portion TTL, thereby notifying that the second tutorial display portion TTL has become a stock area. That is, the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 is stock-displayed on the second tutorial display portion TTL in the icon display mode.

  Thereafter, the swordsman reach described with reference to FIG. 158 is started. When the swordsman reach is started, the entire UI unit is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 160 (f ′) is a diagram illustrating a state immediately after the swordsman reach is started. That is, a state immediately after the background images of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched from the castle town to the wilderness is shown. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 160 (f ′), the UI portion is located at the position where the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 that is stock-displayed in the second tutorial display portion TTL is displayed. The flash display is displayed at the same time as the entire display disappears. In addition, an in-animation IA serving as a button effect is displayed between Tono and Swordsman. In FIG. 160 (f ′), the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 moves from the flash display displayed at the position where the button notice icon 137I was displayed toward the flash display of the in-animation IA. Yes.

  In FIG. 160 (f ′) following FIG. 160 (f ′), the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137 is digested in the flash display of the in-animation IA, and the button effect of the second chance button 137 is displayed. Is started.

  In FIG. 160 described above, an example of the icon related to the second chance button 137 is the button notice icon 137I of the second chance button 137. Moreover, the 2nd button meter 137m is also raised. This button notice icon 137I is an icon for notifying that the button presentation of the second chance button 137 is started, and the button notice icon 137I appears when the second button meter 137m is full, It can be said that it is an icon for notifying that the button production of the second chance button 137 is started. Further, whether the button notice icon 137I or the second button meter 137m is an icon displayed before the start of the judgment effect (first effect) shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to 158 (o). .

  As described above, the first chance button 136 that vibrates in the final judge effect is displayed as an icon before the final judge effect started from FIG. 158 (l), so that the first chance button 136 is displayed. The player's consciousness can be increased, and thereafter, it can be easily noticed that the first chance button 136 is vibrating. In particular, since the first chance button 136 vibrates regardless of the effect, it may not be noticed even if it vibrates, so the prior icon display is effective.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples in which icons relating to the first chance button 136 are displayed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 161 corresponds to the effect example in which the icon related to the second chance button 137 in the effect example shown in FIG. 160 is changed to the icon related to the first chance button 136. Hereinafter, the difference from the example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 will be mainly described.

  The state of FIG. 161 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 158 (b), similar to the state of FIG. 160 (a), and the symbol of FIG. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (a), a part icon p2 appears under the background image of the castle town. The part icon p2 shown in FIG. 161 (a) corresponds to an icon of “+1” indicating the number of parts necessary for stocking the button notice icon of the first chance button 136. The button notice icon of the first chance button 136 is an icon for notifying that the button effect of the first chance button 136 is started, and is an icon imitating the first chance button 136. The parts icon p2 is also an icon that appears at every timing, like the previous part icon p1. Also, the part icon p2 may be displayed in various other modes (for example, color, “× 2”, and the like), similarly to the previous part icon p1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 161 (a), a round first button meter 136m ′ simulating the shape of the first chance button 136 and a button notice icon for the first chance button 136 are displayed. The remaining digestible number of times (that is, the number of stocks) is displayed. The first button meter 136m 'is also composed of four parts, and the parts are accumulated when the above-described parts icon p2 appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (a), the first button meter 136m ′ has not yet stored any parts, the number of stocks is displayed as “0 more times”, and the first chance button 136 that can be digested is displayed. It is reported that no button notice icon exists.

  In FIG. 161 (b), the part icon p2 is deleted and one part of the first button meter 136m 'is stored. In the display of the first button meter 136m ', the part where the parts are stored is lit red.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows a state in which up to three parts of the first button meter 136m ′ are accumulated, and a part icon p1 corresponding to the remaining one appears on the tutorial display portion TT1.

  FIG. 161 (d) shows a state in which the first button meter 136m ′ is full. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. The indication of the remaining digestible number of the 136 button notice icons becomes “one more time”, it is notified that one button notice icon of the first chance button 136 has been stocked, and the first button meter 136m ′ However, the display mode is changed so that no parts are stored.

  Thereafter, also in FIG. 161 (f), the symbol variation of the special figure 1 continues without reaching the reach state, and the background images of the castle town are still displayed on the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. . In the example shown in FIG. 160, the button effect is performed as a part of the super reach effect, but in this example, the button effect of the first chance button 136 is started even if the reach state is not reached. The button effect may be started as soon as one button notice icon is stocked, or may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since stocking. Alternatively, it may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of symbol variation display. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 161 (f), a flash display is displayed so as to cover the entire first button meter 136m ′, and a button notice icon of the first chance button 136 is displayed from the flash display. 136I moves into the flash display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the button notice icon 136I of the first chance button 136 is digested, and the button effect of the first chance button 136 is started. The That is, in FIG. 161 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a button image 136a simulating a round first chance button 136 that is lit in red, and an operation of the first chance button 136 ( Three sets of an arrow display 136b as a promotion display prompting the user to press) and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the first chance button 136 as an effective one set. Is displayed. In addition, the first chance button 136 that has been lit white until now is switched to red lighting at the same time as the button effect starts. Thereafter, the same effects as those after FIG. 158 (e) are executed.

  In FIG. 161 described above, an icon related to the first chance button 136 is the button notice icon 136I of the first chance button 136. There is also a first button meter 136m.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects using the first operating means and the second operating means in the slot machine shown in FIG. 63.

  Here, the first operation means is shown as a circular operation button, and the second operation means is shown as a horizontally long rounded rectangular operation button. For example, the circular operation button is an operation key shown in FIG. A horizontally long rounded rectangular operation button corresponding to the OK button 181b of the unit 181 corresponds to the effect button 1091 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the first operation unit 181b and the second operation unit 1091 are used. 162 also shows the liquid crystal display device 1057 described with reference to FIG. 63 and the start lever 1035 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 162 (a), the second operating means 1091 is operated (pressed) in the state where the effects are being executed by the effect means including the liquid crystal display device 1057. Then, a judgment effect, which is a kind of notice effect, is started, and as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1057 displays the character “WIN” as the judgment result, and the first operation means 181b. Both operation means of the second operation means 1091 start to vibrate.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), a character display such as “RUSH confirmation” for informing that the execution of the bonus game or the AT (assist time) game in which the operation order suggesting effect is executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. 1057 is displayed. Even if this character display is displayed, the operation means of the first operation means 181b and the second operation means 1091 continue to vibrate.

  Eventually, the vibration of the first operating means 181b stops and the vibration of the second operating means 1091 also stops. Both vibrations may be stopped at the same time or may be shifted. FIG. 162 (d) shows the first operating means 181b that stops the vibration and the second operating means 1091 that similarly stops the vibration. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1057 shown in FIG. 162 (d) still displays a character display such as “RUSH confirmation”. This character display continues to be displayed until an operation for starting the next game (for example, an operation of the start lever 1035 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 shown in FIG. 63) is performed.

  In FIG. 162 (e), the start lever 1035 is operated, and in the liquid crystal display device 1057 shown in FIG. 162 (e) following FIG. 162 (e), the character display of “RUSH confirmation” disappears and a different display (here, “RUSH start” is displayed.

  It should be noted that the effects described in FIGS. 158 to 162 described above can be combined with various effects included only in FIGS. 125 to 157 as long as no contradiction occurs. To sum up the explanation so far, the second operating means (for example, the first chance button 136) that vibrates regardless of the first effect (for example, the notice effect) is displayed before the start of the first effect. Previbration may or may not be performed. Further, the first operating means (for example, the second chance button 137) may or may not perform the previbration before the start of the first effect. Furthermore, the first operation means (for example, the second chance button 137) may vibrate in the first effect regardless of the first effect. Alternatively, the first operation means may vibrate as an effect operation in the first effect. In this case, even if the second operating means that vibrates (for example, the first chance button 136) is operated, the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display device is not changed, and other effect operations are also generated. However, if the first operating means that vibrates (for example, the second chance button 137) is operated, the effect display displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like is changed to a display corresponding to the operation, or other effect operations are performed. It is newly generated according to the operation.

Above,
[First operation means [for example, the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the transparent portion (glass button) 191 shown in FIG. 21, etc., the OK button 181b, FIG. Cancel button 181c etc.],
Second operating means [for example, the first chance button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the effect button 1091 shown in FIG. 161],
A game machine equipped with
The second operating means is means including second light emitting means [for example, a light emitter such as an LED capable of emitting light in full color]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), and FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. q), FIG. 26 (m) to the final judge production shown in FIG.
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second light emitting means [for example, the first chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158] emits light in the second mode [for example, rainbow light emitting mode] [for example, FIG. 158 (l) ~ Figure (o)],
In the first performance, the second operating means vibrates [eg, FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. 24 (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. (Q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc., and the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means vibrates by vibrating]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The second operating means may be one in which the second light emitting means is provided in a portion that operates by operation. For example, the second light emitting means may be provided in a part that is pushed down by a pressing operation, and the second light emitting means may be pushed down together, or the second light emitting means may be provided in a part that is tilted by a tilting operation. And the second light emitting means may be inclined together. On the other hand, the second operating means may be one in which the second light emitting means is provided at a location different from the portion operated by the operation. For example, the second light emitting unit may be provided further below a portion that is pushed down by a pressing operation, and the position of the second light emitting unit may not change even when the pressing operation is performed. In any case, it can be visually recognized that the second light emitting means emits light. More specifically, the second light emitting means may be covered with the operation surface of the second operation means, or provided on the back side of the operation surface of the second operation means. It may be a thing. In these cases, the fact that the second light emitting means emits light is visible from the operation surface. Further, the second light emitting means may be provided around the operation surface of the second operation means. Further, the second operating means may be provided at a position different from the position where the second operating means is provided. However, in any case, the second light emitting means is a light emitting means that may emit light in response to an operation of the second operating means.

  The second light emitting means may emit one or more effects different from the first effect in the second mode, or the second effect is limited to the first effect. It may be a light emitting means that may emit light in a manner. That is, the second aspect may be a dedicated aspect of the first effect or may not be a dedicated aspect.

  In the first performance, the vibration start of the second operation means may be earlier or slower than the light emission start of the second light emission means, or both may be simultaneous. Good. In the first effect, the end of the vibration of the second operating means may be earlier or later than the end of light emission of the second light emitting means, or both may be simultaneous. May be. Furthermore, in the first effect, the relationship between the timing of the light emission start of the second light emitting means and the timing of the vibration start of the second operation means, the light emission end of the second light emitting means and the second operation means. The relationship of the timing of the end of vibration may always be an invariant relationship, or may be a relationship in which one changes earlier or later depending on circumstances.

  Here, the light emission of the second light emitting means is described in the first effect, but the effect of the effect means that is a superordinate concept of the second light emitting means may be used. For example, it may be an operation (such as dropping or rotation) by a movable means or a rotation of the second light emitting means.

  The structure which alert | reports that it becomes a big hit before the start of said 1st effect may be sufficient. In this case, before the start of the first effect, the second light emitting means may emit light in the second mode (for example, a mode in which light emission is changed to seven colors (a so-called rainbow mode).

  In the first effect, the second light emitting means may not emit light in the second mode, or may always emit light in the second mode.

  Furthermore, the second operation means may be composed of a plurality of operation means (for example, a cross key and a determination button), or may be composed of a single operation means (hereinafter the same). . In the former case, only a part of the plurality of operation means may be vibrated, or all the operation means may be vibrated (hereinafter the same).

  The first effect may or may not include an output of effect display and / or effect sound (for example, sound effects, phrases, music, etc.). The effect display and / or the output of the effect sound may or may not be performed accompanying the first effect (the same applies hereinafter). That is, as an example of the first effect, the effect display and the output of the effect sound can be enumerated, but the first effect may be all of the above enumerated or combined. Or some of the above-listed ones that are not applicable (the same applies hereinafter).

  The second operation means may be a means including only the second light emitting means, or may include means other than the second light emitting means (for example, a blowing means or a spraying means). It is good (hereinafter the same).

  Depending on the operation of the first operating means, the first effect may not start or may always start (the same applies hereinafter).

  In the first performance, the second operation means may not vibrate or may vibrate (the same applies hereinafter).

  The first operation means may be capable of vibrating or non-vibrable (the same applies hereinafter). The first operating means may be one that vibrates in a state where the second operating means is vibrating, or may not vibrate (hereinafter the same). The second operating means is a means provided with a second vibrating means, and the first operating means is the second operating means that vibrates when the second operating means vibrates. The vibration of the vibration means may be transmitted to the first operation means, and the first operation means may vibrate together. The first operation means may be separate from the second vibration means. The first vibration means may be provided, and the first operation means may also vibrate when the first vibration means vibrates (the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the second operating means does not vibrate while the second operating means vibrates, the vibration of the second operating means is not transmitted to the first operating means. Further, the first operating means may be in a mode that does not vibrate (hereinafter the same). In this case, the first operating means may not be provided with a vibrating means, and if the first operating means is provided with the first vibrating means, the first vibrating means is vibrated. (Same below). When the above is summarized, the aspect provided with only one vibration means may be sufficient, and the aspect provided for every operation means may be sufficient (hereinafter, the same).

  The first effect is an effect that starts in response to the operation of the first operation means, but if the start condition is satisfied even if the first operation means is not operated (for example, the first time When the first operation means is operated, the first operation means may be operated and the first operation means may be operated. The content of the first effect may be changed depending on the case where it has not been performed, or the effect of the same content (the effect that does not change depending on the presence or absence of the operation) may be used (hereinafter the same). Alternatively, on the contrary, when the first operation means is not operated, the first effect may not be started (hereinafter the same).

Also,
The first operation means [for example, the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 158] includes first light emitting means [for example, a light emitting body such as an LED that can emit light in full color]
The first light emitting means may emit light in accordance with the operation of the first operating means [for example, FIG. 158 (l) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect may be an effect that the first light emitting unit may emit light, an effect that always emits light, or an effect that does not emit light.

  The first operating means may be a means including only the first light emitting means, or may include means other than the first light emitting means (for example, a blowing means or a spraying means). Also good.

Also,
“The second light emitting means [for example, the first chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158] is different from the first effect [for example, the turn of FIG. 158 (d) to FIG. In the production], it is means for emitting [for example, emitting light in FIGS. 158 (d) to (e)] in the first aspect [for example, red light emitting aspect].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  A plurality of types of effects may be prepared as the one effect. Further, the second light emitting means may emit light in the first aspect in the second effect.

  The second light emitting means may emit light in the first mode even in the first effect.

In addition,
[First operation means [for example, the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the transparent portion (glass button) 191 shown in FIG. 21, etc., the OK button 181b, FIG. Cancel button 181c etc.],
Second operating means [for example, the first chance button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the effect button 1091 shown in FIG. 161],
A game machine equipped with
The second operation means [for example, the first chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158] is used for one setting operation [for example, the reach type selection setting operation described with reference to FIG. 159 (a), FIG. A) may be used for the volume setting operation described using A), the music setting operation described using FIG.
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), and FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. q), FIG. 26 (m) to the final judge production shown in FIG.
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first performance, the second operating means vibrates [eg, FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. 24 (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. (Q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc., and the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means vibrates by vibrating]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The second operation means may be a means that is always used for the one setting operation, or may be a means that may not be used.

  The second operation means may be a means used only for the one setting operation, or may be used for an operation other than the one setting operation (for example, a production operation). Alternatively, it may be a means that is always used for operations other than the one setting operation.

  A plurality of types of setting operations may be prepared as the one setting operation.

Also,
“The one setting operation is an operation performed when setting one of a plurality of options [for example, a determination operation in FIG. 159 (a) or FIG. (Selection operation in (a)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The plurality of options mentioned here may be analog options (for example, continuous value options) or digital options (for example, discrete value options).

  The one setting operation includes at least one of a selection operation and a determination operation. For example, the selection may be performed automatically and may be set to the option selected at the timing when the determination operation is performed. In this case, the one setting operation includes the determination operation. Only included. For example, it may be determined only by operating the second operating means. Further, when a selection operation is performed and a predetermined time elapses, the option selected at the time may be automatically determined and set as the option. The setting operation includes only the selection operation. For example, when the time expires, the one at the cursor position may be determined, or may be determined by operating the second operation means before the time expires. When the selection operation is performed in the first operation mode (for example, short press) and the determination operation is performed in the second operation mode (for example, long press), the one setting operation includes the selection operation and Both decision operations are included.

  As specific examples of the one setting operation, volume setting, light quantity and luminance setting, original mode setting, music setting, production setting (for example, reach mode setting) and the like can be listed. That is, the parameters to be set are not particularly limited, and the one setting operation may be all of the above-described enumerations or a combination thereof. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The second operation means may be a means including a second light emitting means, and in this case, the one setting operation may be a setting of the light amount and the luminance of the second light emitting means. .

  The one setting operation may be an operation for determining to select one option from a plurality of options.

Also,
“The one setting operation is an operation that is accepted in a state in which the symbol stop display is performed [for example, a state in which the display is switched from the demonstration display or a big hit gaming state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The one setting operation may be an operation that can be accepted only in a state where a symbol stop display is performed, or may be an operation that is accepted even in a state where a symbol variation display is performed.

  The one setting operation may be, for example, an operation accepted during a big hit game or an operation accepted during a demonstration display.

In addition,
[First operation means [for example, the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the transparent portion (glass button) 191 shown in FIG. 21, etc., the OK button 181b, FIG. Cancel button 181c etc.],
Second operating means [for example, the first chance button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the effect button 1091 shown in FIG. 161],
First production means [e.g., family crest role 224E, Yatsushiro role 224Fa, general role 224Fb, light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 158],
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), and FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. q), FIG. 26 (m) to the final judge production shown in FIG.
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first production, the first production means performs a first production operation [for example, a movement operation of the family crest actor 224E shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (n), a yellow light emission operation of the light guide plate IL. , Swing motion of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb]
In the first performance, the second operating means vibrates [eg, FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. 24 (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. (Q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc., and the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means vibrates by vibrating]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  As an example of the first rendering means, movable means, display means, light emitting means, sound output means, and the like can be listed. In other words, the first effect means may be all of the above-mentioned enumerations or a combination thereof (for example, a movable means having a light emitting function, a display means having a movable function, etc.). May be. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  As an example of the first effect operation, a moving operation, a rotating operation, a swinging operation, a vibrating operation, a display operation, a light emitting operation, a blinking operation, a sound output operation, and the like can be listed. That is, as said 1st production operation, all the above-mentioned enumeration may be sufficient and what combined may be sufficient. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The second operation means may be means including the first rendering means. That is, the first effect means may be covered with the operation surface of the second operation means, or provided on the back side of the operation surface of the second operation means. Also good. The first effect means may be provided around the operation surface of the second operation means.

  The second operation means is not a means including the first effect means, and the first effect means is a position different from the position where the second operation means is provided (the second operation means). It may be provided at a position distant from the means). For example, the first effect means may be provided on a frame member (front frame door) that opens and closes most on the player side.

  In the first production, the start of vibration of the second operation means may be earlier or later than the start of the first production operation, or both may be simultaneous. . Further, in the first production, the vibration of the second operation means may end earlier or later than the end of the first production operation, or both may be simultaneous. Also good. Further, in the first effect, the relationship between the start of the first effect operation and the vibration start timing of the second operation means, the end of the first effect operation and the vibration of the second operation means. The relationship of the end timing may always be an invariant relationship, or may be a relationship in which one of them is changed earlier or later depending on circumstances.

  In the first effect, the first effect means may or may not always execute the first effect operation.

  The first effect means may be a means that does not execute the first effect operation other than the first effect, or a means that executes the first effect operation other than the first effect. There may be.

  The first presentation means may be means for starting the first presentation operation from an initial state, returning to the initial state, and stopping the first presentation operation. The initial state referred to here may be a state in an initial position or a state in an initial posture.

Also,
A game board [for example, the game board 200 shown in FIG.
Transparent plate-shaped transmission means [for example, the transparent plate member 118 or the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 1] covering the game board from the player side;
With
The first operation means is a means provided on the player side [for example, the front side] with respect to the transmission means,
The second operation means is a means provided closer to the player than the transmission means,
The first rendering means is a means provided on the back side of the transmission means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect means may be means attached to the game board.

  The first rendering means may be a means provided between the transmission means and the display surface of the image display device.

  The transmission means may be a second effect means (movable means), and may further be a means including a light emitting means (for example, a light guide plate).

Also,
[2nd production means [for example, a combined character 224L, 224R shown in FIG. 158 (m)]
The second effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect operation [for example, a coalescence operation or a light emission operation in a rainbow light emission mode].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As an example of the second rendering means, movable means, display means, light emitting means, sound output means, and the like can be listed. In other words, the second effect means may be all of those listed above, or a combination thereof (for example, a movable means having a light emitting function or a display means having a movable function). May be. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The second effect means is different from the type of the first effect means (for example, when the first effect means is a movable means, the second effect means displays the second effect means). Means).

  As an example of the second effect operation, a moving operation, a rotating operation, a swinging operation, a vibrating operation, a display operation, a light emitting operation, a blinking operation, a sound output operation, and the like can be listed. In other words, the second effect operation may be all of the above-described enumerations or a combination thereof. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The second effect operation is different from the type of the first effect operation (for example, when the first effect operation is a moving operation, the second effect operation is a light emission). Behavior).

In addition,
[First operation means [for example, the second chance button 137 shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the transparent portion (glass button) 191 shown in FIG. 21, etc., the OK button 181b, FIG. Cancel button 181c etc.],
Second operating means [for example, the first chance button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 158, etc., the effect button 1091 shown in FIG. 161],
A game machine equipped with
Icons related to the first operation means [for example, the second button meter 137m shown in FIG. 160 or the button notice icon 137I shown in FIG. 160 (f)] may be displayed.
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (l) to (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), and FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. q), FIG. 26 (m) to the final judge production shown in FIG.
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first performance, the second operating means vibrates [eg, FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. 24 (o), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. (Q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc., and the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means vibrates by vibrating]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  As an example of the icon, an icon imitating the appearance of the first operation means, an icon of a character display mode, a character icon, a number icon, an icon of a meter display mode, and the like can be listed. That is, the icons may be all of the above-listed icons or a combination thereof. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The icon may be a hold icon representing the number of holds depending on the number displayed, or may be a variation icon corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation. More specifically, the hold icon may be changed from the first display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the second display mode (for example, the display mode for the pre-reading notice). The change icon may have changed from the display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the second display mode (for example, the display mode for the current symbol change notice). The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is started.

  The icon may not be displayed, only the icon may be displayed, or the icon may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“The icon is an icon for notifying that an effect related to the first operation means [for example, a button effect of the second chance button 137 (FIGS. 158 (i) to (k)] occurs.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The icon is an icon that may be displayed before the first presentation starts [for example, the timing of FIG. 158 (l)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The icon may be an icon that is always displayed before the first effect starts, or may be an icon that may not be displayed even before the first effect starts. .

  Only the icon may be displayed before the first presentation starts, or an icon other than the icon may be displayed.

Also,
“In the state where the second operating means is vibrating [for example, the state where the second vibrating means provided exclusively for the second operating means is vibrating due to vibration] [For example, in the case of FIGS. 158 (l) to (p) or when the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may or may not vibrate. 24 (m) to FIG. 25 (p), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (r1), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect does not use the operation of the second operation means [for example, the effect is performed even if the second operation means is not operated, or the content proceeds without change.” Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is not a notice effect related to the second operation means [for example, an operation notice effect including a notification that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 or a notification regarding the operation result of the chance button 136]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first effect is not an operation system notice effect of the second operation means.

  The first effect may be an effect that does not include a notification that prompts the user to operate the second operation means, or an effect that does not include a notification regarding the result of operating the second operation means. Alternatively, it may be an effect that does not include notifications that change depending on the operation status of the second operation means, an effect that does not include notifications related to the operation of the second operation means, An effect that does not include a notification that prompts the user to operate the first operating means may be included, an effect that does not include a notification regarding the result of operating the first operating means may be included, or the first An effect that does not include a notification that varies depending on the operation status of the operation means may be an effect that does not include a notification related to the operation of the first operation means, or when the first operation means is operated And what to do with no operation It may be an effect that does not change, an effect that does not change between when the second operation means is operated and when it is not operated, or by operating the second operation means. However, the operation of the second operation means may not be accepted or ignored by the sub-control unit (400, 500), Alternatively, the effect may be invalidated on the sub-control unit (400, 500) side.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a climax effect shown in FIG. 158 (f), a button effect started in FIG. 158 (i), a judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m), etc. ],
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second effect is started in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, the pressing operation shown in FIG. 158 (e), the pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l), etc.). Is configured to be
Before the second presentation is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means vibrates [for example, provided exclusively for the second operation means. 16 (j) to 16 (k), FIG. 16 (a) and FIG. 158 (d), for example. 18 (j) to (k) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Equipped with display means capable of displaying an image [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The first effect is the display of the image on the display means [for example, the display of the effect type background image shown in FIG. 158 (l) to FIG. The display of the scene, the effect display in the final judge production shown in FIGS.
The second effect is the display of the image on the display means [for example, the display of the background image of the castle town shown in FIG. 158 (f), the display of the button image 137a shown in FIG. 158 (i), etc. The display by the display of an image different from the image in the first effect, such as the display of the character GC of the princess behind the heel in the judge effect shown in FIG. 18,
A state in which the second operation means vibrates during execution of the first effect [for example, a state in which the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means vibrates and vibrates] When the second operation means is operated, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is configured to be continuously executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second effect is an effect which starts after the decorative symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 158 (f), FIG. 158 (i), FIG. 16 (b)],
Before the second effect is started, the decorative display of the decorative pattern in which the second effect is started [for example, the decorative display of the decorative pattern started in FIG. 158 (b) or FIG. 16 (b). ) After the start of Decorative display variation display started in)
In the second performance, the second operating means vibrates [for example, the second vibrating means provided exclusively for the second operating means vibrates by vibrating] [for example, FIG. 18 (m) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, when the second vibrating means provided exclusively for the second operating means does not vibrate in FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. 14 (l), etc.] In the case where the second operating means vibrates [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. 16 (l), etc., and the second vibrating means provided exclusively for the second operating means vibrates. [Case] is configured to make it easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state or a subsequent probability change state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′), etc.]
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, the second vibration means provided exclusively for the second operation means does not vibrate] [for example, FIG. m ′)-(q ′) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification urging the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 23 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 24 (k), FIG. (L), FIG. 25 (k)]. ~ Transmission part display 191X etc. of the operation promotion notification shown in (l2), FIG. 26 (k) and (l) of FIG.
The first effect is the first period [for example, the period from FIG. 23 (k) to (l), the period from FIG. 24 (k) to (l), FIG. 25 (k) to FIG. In the period of (l2), the period of FIG. 26 (m) to the period of (l), etc.], the production starts when the first operating means is operated,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second operating means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being executed [for example, the whole period in the examples of FIGS. 24 to 25 and 26, and the example of FIG. 23. In the same figure (q), it is configured to vibrate [for example, the second vibrating means provided exclusively for the second operating means vibrates when it vibrates] during part of the period etc. Means that
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first production can be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first effect may be a notice effect. The second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a small operating means.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first state is a state in the entire period in which the first effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
When the second operation means is operated within the second period, the second effect is started, and when the second operation device is operated, the second effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The second operating means may be an operating means that always vibrates when the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate even in at least a part of the state in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The first state is a state where the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
When the first effect is started when the first operation means is operated within the first period, and when the first effect is not started even when the first operation means is operated, Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate or configured to vibrate without fail.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated in a state where the first notification is being executed, It may be an operating means.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, it is configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect can be started,
In the state where the third effect is being executed, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first production is configured to start according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first performance, the second operating means is configured to vibrate,
In a state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect related to the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second production may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
Before the second presentation is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is configured to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to appendix 12,
A display means capable of displaying an image;
The first effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means,
The second effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means,
If the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to appendix 12 or 13,
The second effect is an effect that starts after the decorative symbol variation display is started,
The time before the second effect is started is after the decorative display of the decorative pattern at which the second effect is started is started.
In the second performance, the second operating means is configured to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 14,
The case where the second operation means vibrates more easily than the case where the second operation means does not vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third performance, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 16,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 17,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The first effect is an effect that starts when the first operation means is operated in the first period,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 18,
The second operation means is a means configured to vibrate in at least a part of a period during which the first effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 19,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 19,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
A gaming table according to appendix a1 or a2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
A gaming machine according to appendix a5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
A gaming machine according to appendix a7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
A gaming machine according to appendix a9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix a12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a16)
A gaming machine according to appendix a15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a17)
The game stand according to appendix a15 or a16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a15 to a19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a21)
A gaming machine according to appendix a20,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a24)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a15 to a25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a28)
A game machine according to appendix a27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a15 to a28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a31)
A gaming machine according to appendix a30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a32)
The game stand according to appendix a30 or a31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a32,
The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a34)
A gaming machine according to appendix a33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a35)
A game machine according to appendix a34,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a37)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a30 to a36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a38)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a30 to a36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a40)
A gaming machine according to appendix a39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a41)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a41,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix a43)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a30 to a43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix a46)
A game machine according to appendix a45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix a47)
The game stand according to appendix a45 or a46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix a48)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a45 to a47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix a49)
A game machine according to appendix a48,
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix a50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a45 to a49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix a51)
A gaming machine according to appendix a50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix a52)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a45 to a51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a53)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a45 to a51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix a55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix a56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix a57)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a54 to a56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a58)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a54 to a56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix a60)
A gaming machine according to appendix a59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix a61)
The game stand according to appendix a59 or a60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix a62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a59 to a61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix a63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a59 to a62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix a65)
A gaming machine according to appendix a64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix a66)
The game stand according to appendix a64 or a65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix a67)
The game stand according to appendix a64 or a65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons indicated by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix a68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a69)
A game machine according to appendix a68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a70)
The game stand according to appendix a68 or a69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the animation display position in the middle. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix a72)
A gaming machine according to appendix a71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a73)
The game stand according to appendix a71 or a72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix a74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a71 to a73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a71 to a73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix a76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a71 to a75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix a77)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a71 to a76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a71 to a77,
“The notice icon is an icon that is displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” described in appendix a71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a79)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a71 to a78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a81)
A gaming machine according to appendix a80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a82)
A gaming machine according to appendix a81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a80 to a82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a84)
A game machine according to appendix a83,
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a80 to a84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a87)
A gaming machine according to appendix a86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a88)
The game stand according to appendix a87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a89)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a86 to a88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a86 to a89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a86 to a90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix a92)
A game machine according to appendix a91,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

(Appendix a93)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first notice icon”),
The second display is a display including a display representing the first notice icon in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix a94)
The game stand according to appendix a93,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a95)
A game machine according to appendix a93 or a94,
The third display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a96)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a93 to a95,
The first display is a display displayed in a hold display frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a97)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a93 to a96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix a98)
A gaming machine according to appendix a97,
The second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game stand according to appendix 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a101)
A game machine according to appendix a100,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion expanded from the first display of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “expanded portion”), the fourth display can be displayed.
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a102)
A gaming machine according to appendix a101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a103)
The game stand according to appendix a101 or appendix a102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a104)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a100 to a103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a105)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a106)
A game machine according to appendix a105,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a107)
A game machine according to appendix a106,
The effect display is a display of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a108)
The game stand according to appendix a106 or appendix a107,
The effect display is a display that changes a display mode of the icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a109)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a106 to a108,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a110)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a106 to a109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of lines,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a106 to a110,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a112)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a105 to a111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a113)
The game stand according to appendix a112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a114)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a105 to a114,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a115)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the third display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a116)
A game machine according to appendix a115,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a117)
A gaming machine according to appendix a116,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a118)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices a115 to a117,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a119)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a118,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area in the display means when displayed,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a120)
A gaming machine according to appendix a119,
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a121)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a120,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a122)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a121,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is means capable of displaying a display in cooperation with the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a123)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a122,
The first display area is a display area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a124)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a123,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”),
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a125)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a115 to a124,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a character display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area in the display means when displayed.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area,
A plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b1 or b2,
It is configured to be able to display multiple types of icons as a notice icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
In a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
Operation means;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a character display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area in the display means when displayed.
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area,
It is configured to be able to display multiple types of icons as a notice icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
A gaming table according to appendix b4 or b5,
The first icon is an icon for notifying the occurrence of a button effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the term “notice icon” described so far is named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. For example, a game ball is enclosed in a main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is used by being circulated in the main body of the pachinko machine. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button (first chance button) / production button 136X Initial position display 136a Button image 136b Arrow display 136c Remaining period meter display 137 Second chance button 137a Button image 137c Remaining period meter display 137I button Preliminary icon 138 Chance button lamp 181 Operation key unit 190 Transmission unit 191 Transmission unit 191X Transmission unit display 208 Decoration symbol display device 209 'Timer notification display means 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 224 Production movable body 224E Family crest character 224Fa Yatsushiro character 224Fb General character IL Light guide plate 246 Shielding device 247 Crest character 248 Combined material 281 Special icon 1 hold icon display area 285 Notice icon display area 286 stagecraft hold lamps h1~h8 held icon c change icon T timer notice display T1-hour e4, e5 effect indication 300 main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
412 Counter timer 418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Ramp for game board 542 Ramp for game stand frame 600 Delivery control unit 1000 Slot machine

Claims (16)

A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
The second operation means is a means that may be used for one setting operation,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first production starts in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first performance, the second operation means vibrates.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
In a state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The first effect is not a notice effect related to the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The second production may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
Before the second presentation is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is configured to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
A display means capable of displaying an image;
The first effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means,
The second effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means,
If the second operation means is operated while the second operation means is vibrating during execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 5 or 6,
The second effect is an effect that starts after the decorative symbol variation display is started,
The time before the second effect is started is after the decorative display of the decorative pattern at which the second effect is started is started.
In the second performance, the second operating means is configured to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The case where the second operation means vibrates more easily than the case where the second operation means does not vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third production is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third performance, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 9,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The first effect is an effect that starts when the first operation means is operated in the first period,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The second operation means is a means configured to vibrate in at least a part of a period during which the first effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The one setting operation is an operation performed when setting one option among a plurality of options.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 13,
The one setting operation is an operation that is accepted in a state where a symbol stop display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.